Pre-Installation

Pre-Installation
Technical Data
1336 PLUS II
Adjustable
Frequency
AC Drive
A Complete Line of Drives for a
Complete Family of Products
Available in ratings from 0.37 to 448 kW (0.5 to 600 horsepower), the drive helps to provide a single
solution for virtually all of your speed control requirements. Commonality of design across the entire
range, coupled with identical control interface functions, device communications, training and
maintenance, provide you with a tremendous advantage in your control needs. Add that to integration
with Allen-Bradley SMC™ and SMP™ power products, the 1305 drive, the
1336 IMPACT™ and 1336 FORCE™ field-oriented control drives (all of which
use the same control interface and communication options) and you’ve just
gained significant advantage in system design, component integration,
operator training and maintenance.
2
Table of Contents
1336 PLUS II Product Data
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fault and Parameter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1336 PLUS II PRE-INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Input Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
AC Supply Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power Wiring – TB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Control and Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
General Wiring Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Terminal Block – TB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Terminal Block – TB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Encoder Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pulse Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Analog Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Motor Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
User Supplied Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Derating Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1336 PLUS II Remote Device Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1336 PLUS II SELECTION GUIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Constant/Variable Torque Drives and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Language Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Dynamic Brake Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Factory Installed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Field Installed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Configured Drives Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69-119
3
Product Description
Features
Protective
• Detection and Trip:
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Drive Overcurrent
Overtemperature
External Signal
Drive Output Short
Ground Fault
Encoder Loss
At temperature
Load Loss
Single Phase
• Overcurrent Stall
• Overvoltage Stall
• Six Drive Alarms
• Fault Reset Input
Special Function
• Auto Economizer
• Process PI Controller
• Traverse Function
• Selectable Fault
Reset & Run
• Auto Restart on Power Up
• Speed Sensitive Electronic
Overload
• Auto-tuning
Operational
•
Control
• Selectable Volts/Hertz Mode
• Multi-lingual selection
Programmable
• Dual Accel/Decel Profiles
• Three Skip Frequencies
• DC Injection Braking
• Dynamic Braking
• Slip Compensation
• Negative Slip Compensation
(Droop)
• S Curve Accel/Decel Profile
• Line Loss Restart Mode
• Proactive Current Limit
• Last Four Event Fault Memory
• Flying Start
• Seven Preset Speeds
I/O Interface
• Control Output Contacts
(2) Form A (N.O.)
(2) Form C (N.O. - N.C.)
Programmable to 17
different drive variables.
• Flexible Analog
Inputs/Outputs
• Pulse Train Input
• Encoder Feedback Closed
Loop Speed Control
• High Speed Input
Diagnostics
Real time preventive maintenance coupled with
customized status and fault reporting.
Depending upon your particular drive configuration, status and
fault conditions can be reported through the Human Interface
Module or through the SCANport ™ Communications Port. Fault
diagnostic routines are started each time the 1336 PLUS II is
powered up. Throughout the entire run sequence, the drive will
continue to look for potential fault conditions.
To allow real-time preventive maintenance, drive output current
and control conditions can be selectively monitored while the drive
is running. The operator is made aware of alarm conditions such as
current limit, bus voltage status, motor overload or drive overload
before the drive reaches a fault level. Should a fault occur, plain
language diagnostic messages will help identify and isolate the
problem, allowing personnel to take quick, corrective action.
Packaging
Small size conserves expensive panel space.
Planer Construction eliminates most internal cables and connectors.
Increases reliability.
Laminar Bus Design reduces internal inductance, thereby
reducing snubber losses and improving IGBT performance.
Removable Human Interface provides simplicity of programming
and flexibility of operation.
Thermal Dissipation Management. Design and extensive infrared testing minimizes hot spots to maximize reliability.
NEMA and European standards. Designed for acceptability
throughout the world.
IP 65 & 54 (NEMA Type 4 & 12) configurations accommodated with
“heat sink through the back” design.
Electrical
IGBT’s (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors)
• Quiet motor operation through programmable carrier frequency.
• Third Generation devices – Reduced switching and
conduction losses.
• Used on complete line 0.37-448 kW (0.5-600 HP).
Status LEDs. Four status indicators located on the control board.
Dynamic Current Control
• Multiple sensors.
• Exceptional torque production through
Control.
• Proactive current limit control – Reduces trips.
• Ability to start low inductance motors.
4
Independent Certification. C-UL Listed for dual U.S. and
Canadian Certification. Designed to meet EN, IEC, VDE and other
international standards.
Isolated Power and Logic eliminates noise to provide reliable
and stable operation.
DC Cooling Fan on many ratings eliminates the need for a
transformer and voltage tapping; accommodates global usage.
Internal Logic Supply from DC Bus does not require separate
control power wiring, improved ride-thru capability.
Communications. Designed to accommodate on-board
communications for all ratings.
Product Description
The 1336 PLUS II
The standard solution to your application needs.
The 1336 PLUS II provides ratings from 0.37-448 kW (0.5-600 HP)
in three voltage ranges – 200-240V AC, 380-480V AC and
500-600V AC. The 1336 PLUS II is a micro-processor based
adjustable frequency PWM AC drive. Its advanced design provides
exceptional reliability when controlling 3-phase motors. The output
can be tuned to provide optimum performance for virtually any load
condition. Selectable
or V/Hz operation provides
outstanding motor control.
Simplicity
Design and programming simplicity is evident in:
• Condensed packaging that allows for easy mounting,
installation and wiring in all types of applications.
• Common assembly parts that reduces the need to stock
a multitude of parts.
• Easy to program parameters that are organized in a group
and element structure for quick access to related functions.
• Simple tuning for optimum torque performance.
• An easy to read Supertwist Liquid Crystal Display gives
2 lines of 16 characters each for easy “one finger”
programming and drive monitoring.
• Serial communications that provide easy integration and
access to peripheral equipment – Fully compatible with all
Allen-Bradley PLC ® or SLC ™ equipment.
• Common options that are used throughout the entire
family of Drives.
Flexibility
Digitally programmable to help provide precise and
accurate control.
The l336 PLUS II uses digitally programmable features to achieve
precise and consistently accurate control, setup and operation.
The drive can be programmed locally from the Human Interface
Module or through a serial communications port using a PLC, SLC,
or DriveTools™ programming software.
Configurable I/O allows simple connection to many
customer preformed control schemes.
Control inputs and outputs can be programmed to meet nearly
every application requirement.
Performance
Powerful algorithms provide unparalleled
performance.
Starting acceleration and running torque in excess of 250%
combined with a constant torque speed range of 120:1 allow the
1336 PLUS II to handle the tough applications other drives can’t.
DriveTools, PLC, SLC and SCANport are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
5
Specifications
Protection Specifications
AC Input Overvoltage Trip
AC Input Undervoltage Trip
Bus Overvoltage Trip
Bus Undervoltage Trip
Nominal Bus Voltage
Heat Sink Thermistor
200-240V Drive
380-480V Drive
285V AC
570V AC
138V AC
280V AC
405V DC
810V DC
200V DC
400V DC
324V DC
648V DC
Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip.
500-600V Drive
690V AC
343V AC
1013V DC
498V DC
810V DC
Drive Overcurrent Trip
Software Current Limit:
20 to 160% of VT rated current.
Hardware Current Limit:
180 to 250% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating).
Instantaneous Current Limit: 220 to 300% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating).
Line transients
Up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991.
Control Logic Noise Immunity
Showering arc transients up to 1500 volts peak.
Power Ride-Thru
15 milliseconds at full load (refer to Page 13).
Logic Control Ride-Thru
0.5 seconds minimum, 2 seconds typical (refer to Page 13).
Ground Fault Trip
Phase-to-Ground on Drive Output.
Short Circuit Trip
Phase-to-Phase on Drive Output.
Environmental Specifications
Altitude
1000 m (3300 ft) maximum without derating.
(refer to the Derating Guidelines on Pages 56-60).
Ambient Operating Temperature
IP00, Open:
0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F).
IP20, NEMA Type 1:
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
IP54, NEMA Type 12:
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
IP65, NEMA Type 4:
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
(refer to the Derating Guidelines on Pages 56-60).
Storage Temperature (all constructions)
- 40 to 70 degrees C (- 40 to 158 degrees F).
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% non-condensing.
Shock
15G peak for 11 ms duration (±1.0 ms).
Vibration
0.006 inches (0.152 mm) displacement, 1G peak.
Agency Certification
U.L. Listed
CSA Certified
LI
LI
UL
ND 
CONT E
Q
Q
CONT E
ED 56L
ST
6

I
I
ND
UL
6
ED 56L
ST
C
Marked for all applicable directives 1
Emissions
Immunity
Low Voltage
EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
EN 55011 Class A
EN 55011 Class B
EN 50082-1
EN 50082-2
IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 per EN 50082-1, 2
EN 60204-1
PREN 50178
1 Note: Installation guidelines called out in Appendix C of the 1336 PLUS II User Manual (publication 1336 PLUS-5.3) must be adhered to.
6
Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Input Data
Voltage Tolerance:
Frequency Tolerance:
Input Phases:
–10% of Minimum, +10% of Maximum.
48-62 Hz.
Three-Phase input provides full rating for all drives.
Single-Phase operation is possible for A & B Frame drives
at a derating of 50%.
(refer to frame designations on Page 22 and the Derating Guidelines on Pages 56-60).
Displacement Power Factor
A1 - A3 Frame:
A4 Frame & Up:
0.80 Standard, 0.95 with Optional Inductor.
0.95 Standard.
Efficiency
97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.
Maximum Short Circuit Current Rating
200,000A rms symmetrical, 600 volts (when used with AC line fuses specified on Page 37).
Control Specifications
Method
Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency. Ratings apply to all drives.
A Frame
2-10 kHz. Drive Rating based on 4 kHz.
B Frame
2-8 kHz. Drive Rating based on 4 kHz.
C & D Frame
2-6 kHz. Drive Rating based on 4 kHz.
E Frame & Up
2-6 kHz. Drive Rating based on 2 kHz.
(refer to frame designations on Page 22 and the Derating Guidelines on Pages 56-60).
Output Voltage Range
0 to rated voltage.
Output Frequency Range
0 to 400 Hz.
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input:
Analog Input:
Selectable Motor Control
Within ±0.01% of set output frequency.
Within ±0.4% of maximum output frequency.
control with full tuning. Standard V/Hz with full custom capability.
Accel/Decel
Two independently programmable accel and decel times.
Each time may be programmed from 0 to 3600 seconds in 0.1 second increments 1.
Intermittent Overload
Constant Torque:
Variable Torque:
Current Limit Capability
Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160% of rated output current.
Independently programmable proportional and integral gain.
Inverse Time Overload Capability
Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response.
Investigated by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. file E59272, volume 4/6.
150% of rated output for 1 minute.
115% of rated output for 1 minute.
Display Specifications
Local Programming and Display Panel
Backlit Supertwist LCD display. 2 lines, 16 characters each. Multi-lingual display of status, faults
and programming. Process Display provides 2 lines, any 2 parameters, scalable with
user text. Selectable “Power Up” display.
Load Specifications
Requirements
1 0.1 second increments using a
A balanced 3-phase inductive motor load is typical. Drive power rating is based on
a typical NEMA Design B, 4 or 6 pole motor.
HIM or 0.01 with serial communications.
7
Specifications
Input/Output Ratings
Requirements: Each 1336 PLUS II Drive has constant and variable torque capabilities.
Note: Drive ratings are at nominal values. Refer to Derating Guidelines on Pages 56-60.
Constant Torque
Variable Torque
Cat.
Input
Input Output Output
Input
Input Output Output
No.
kVA
Amps
kVA
Amps
kVA
Amps
kVA
Amps
200-240V Drives
240V Drives
AQF05
AQF07
AQF10
AQF15
AQF20
AQF30
AQF50
AQF75
A007
A010
A015
A020
A025
A030
A040
A050
A060
A075
A100
1.1
1.4
2.2
2.9
3.9
5.7
8.5
9.0
10-12
12-14
17-20
22-26
26-31
27-33
41-49
52-62
62-74
82-99
100-120
A125
BRF05
BRF07
BRF10
BRF15
BRF20
BRF30
BRF50
BRF75
BRF100
BRF150
BRF200
B015
B020
B025
B030
BX040
B040
B050
BX060 1
B060
B075
B100
B125
BX150
B150
B200
B250
BP/BPR250
BX250
B300
BP/BPR300
B350
BP/BPR350
B400
BP/BPR400
B450
BP/BPR450
B500
B600
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
22
22
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
1.1
1.4
2.2
2.9
3.9
5.7
8.5
9.0
10
14
20
26
31
33
49
62
74
99
120
2.8
3.5
5.4
7.3
9.7
14.3
21.3
22.6
23
35
49
63
75
79
119
149
178
238
289
112-134 322
129
380-480V Drives
325
134
322
129
480V Drives
325
0.9-1.0
1.3
1.3-1.6
2.0
1.7-2.1
2.6
2.2-2.6
3.3
3.0-3.7
4.6
4.2-5.1
6.4
6.6-8.0 10.0
8.9-11.3 13.6
10.8-13.6 16.4
16.1-20.4 24.5
18-23
28
16-21
25
21-26
32
26-33
40
30-38
46
40-50
61
38-48
58
48-60
73
62
75
54-68
82
69-87
105
90-114 137
113-143 172
148
178
130-164 197
172-217 261
212-268 322
212-268 322
212-268 322
235-297 357
235-297 357
277-350 421
277-350 421
310-392 471
310-392 471
343-433 521
347-438 527
385-486 585
437-552 664
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
13.3
16.1
24
27
24.2
31
39
45
59
60
75
77
85
106
138
173
180
199
263
325
325
325
360
360
425
425
475
475
525
532
590
670
1.1
1.7
2.2
2.8
3.8
5.7
8.5
13
18.6
20.4
23
23
29
36
41
50
52
62
62
77
99
124
148
148
198
241
268
297
297
350
350
392
392
433
438
486
438
552
552
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.5
4.8
7.2
10.7
15.7
22.4
24.5
28
28
35
43
49
61
63
75
75
93
119
149
178
178
238
290
322
357
357
421
421
471
471
521
527
585
527
664
664
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
15.4
22
24
27
27
34
42
48
59
65
77
77
96
120
150
180
180
240
292
325
360
360
425
425
475
475
525
532
590
532
670
670
1480 Volts Only.
8
2.8
3.5
5.4
7.3
9.7
14.3
21.3
22.6
28
35
49
63
75
79
119
149
178
238
289
0.9
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
8.8
8.8
14
19
26
31
32
48
60
72
96
116
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.2
3.0
4.2
6.7
10.6
12.8
19.1
22
19
25
31
36
47
48
60
61
68
84
110
138
143
159
210
259
259
259
287
287
339
339
387
378
418
424
470
534
0.9
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
8.8
8.8
14
19
26
31
32
48
60
72
96
116
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
12.3
17.5
19.1
22
22
27
33
38
47
52
61
61
76
96
120
143
143
191
233
259
287
287
339
339
378
378
418
424
470
424
534
534
Input
kVA
Variable Torque
Input Output Output
Amps
kVA
Amps
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
22
22
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
400V Drives
0.9
1.4
1.8
2.3
3.2
4.7
7.0
10.3
14.7
16.1
18
18
23
28
32
40
41
49
62
61
78
98
117
148
157
191
212
235
228
261
277
294
310
326
347
372
347
437
437
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.5
4.8
7.2
10.7
15.7
22.4
24.5
28
28
35
43
49
61
63
75
75
93
119
149
178
178
238
290
322
357
357
397
421
446
471
496
527
565
527
664
664
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
12.3
17.5
19.1
22
22
27
33
38
47
52
61
61
76
98
120
143
143
191
233
259
287
279
319
339
359
378
398
424
454
424
534
534
1.33
1.89
2.55
3.33
4.44
6.66
9.99
19.43
22.00
24.00
27.75
29.97
37.74
46.62
53.28
66.60
72.15
83.25
85.47
106.56
133.20
166.50
199.80
199.80
266.40
324.12
360.75
399.60
399.60
471.75
471.75
527.25
527.25
582.75
532.05
654.90
532.00
743.70
743.70
Specifications
Input/Output Ratings (continued)
Cat.
No.
CWF10
CWF20
CWF30
CWF50
CWF75
CWF100
CWF150
CWF200
C025
C030
C040
C050
C060
C075
C100
C125
C150
C200
C250
CX300
C300
C350
CP/CPR350
C400
CP/CPR400
C450
C500
C600
Input
kVA
Constant Torque
Input Output Output
Amps
kVA
Amps
500-600V Drives
2.1-2.5
2.4
4.2-5.0
4.8
6.2-7.5
7.2
8.3-10.0 9.6
9-11
10
11-13
12
17-20
19
21-26
25
27-32
31
31-37
36
38-45
44
48-57
55
52-62
60
73-88
84
94-112 108
118-142 137
144-173 167
217-261 251
244-293 282
256-307 295
258-309 297
301-361 347
301-361 347
343-412 397
343-412 397
386-464 446
429-515 496
515-618 595
2.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
137
167
251
283
297
299
349
349
398
398
448
498
598
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
168
252
284
300
300
350
350
400
400
450
500
600
Input
kVA
Variable Torque
Input Output Output
Amps
kVA
Amps
600V Drives
2.5
5.0
7.5
10.0
11
13
20
26
32
37
45
57
62
88
112
142
173
261
293
307
309
361
361
412
412
464
515
618
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10
12
19
25
31
36
44
55
60
84
108
137
167
251
282
295
297
347
347
397
397
446
496
595
2.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
137
167
251
283
297
299
349
349
398
398
448
498
598
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
168
252
284
298
300
350
350
400
400
450
500
600
Control Inputs
Option L4E/L7E 1 or L4
Contact Closure Interface Board Requirements
Contacts must be capable of operating at 10mA current levels without signal degradation.
Reed type input devices are recommended.
The L4E/L7E options are compatible with the following Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
• 1771-OYL
• 1771-OZL
Note: Option L4 is the same as Option L4E but without encoder feedback terminals.
Option L5E/L8E 1 or L5
+24V AC/DC Interface Board Requirements
Circuits used with Option L5/L8E must be capable of operating with high = true logic.
DC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 8V DC. Leakage current
must be less than 1.5 mA into a 2.5k ohm load.
AC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 10V DC. Leakage current
must be less than 2.5 mA into a 2.5k ohm load.
Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a voltage of +20 to +26 volts and
source a current of approximately 10 mA for each input.
The L5E/L8E options are compatible with these Allen-Bradley PLC® modules:
• 1771-OB
• 1771-OQ16
• 1771-OB16
• 1771-OBD
• 1771-OYL
• 1771-OBN
• 1771-OZL
• 1771-OQ
• 1771-OBB
Note: Option L5 is the same as Option L5E but without encoder feedback terminals.
Option L6E/L9E 1 or L6
115V AC Interface Board Requirements
Circuits used with Option L6E/L9E must be capable of operating with high = true logic.
In the low state, circuits must generate a voltage of no more than 30V AC. Leakage current must be
less than 10 mA into a 6.5k ohm load.
In the high state, circuits must generate a voltage of 90-115V AC ±10% and source a current of
approximately 20 mA for each input.
The L6E/L9E options are compatible with these Allen-Bradley PLC® modules:
• 1771-OW
• 1771-OA
• 1771-OWN
• 1771-OAD
Note: Option L6 is the same as Option L6E but without encoder feedback terminals.
1The encoder loss detection feature of the 1336 PLUS II requires the use of L7E, L8E or L9E.
9
Specifications
Flexible Analog Inputs and Outputs
Analog Option Card Slot A
No Option Card
LA2
LA6
LA7
Analog Option Card Slot B
No Option Card
LA1
LA3
LA4
LA5
Two single-ended, non-isolated inputs configurable for a
potentiometer reference, 0-10V, or 0-20 mA signal
Dual Isolated Input Card
Isolated Bipolar/Isolated Thermistor Input Card
Isolated Bipolar Input/Isolated Input Card
One single-ended, non-isolated input configurable for a
potentiometer reference, 0-10V, or 0-20 mA signal and two
single-ended, non-isolated 0-10V only outputs.
Dual Analog Output Card
Dual Isolated Output Card
Isolated Input/Isolated Output Card
Analog Output/Pulse Output/Pulse Input Card
Digital Inputs and Outputs
Digital Input Specifications
Frequency Resolution:
Maximum frequency programmed divided by 32767 (15 bits).
60 Hz – 0.0018 Hz.
100 Hz – 0.003 Hz.
400 Hz – 0.012 Hz.
Contact Outputs
115V AC, 30V DC – 5.0 Amp Resistive – 2.0 Amp Inductive.
(2) Form C Contacts.
(2) Form A Contacts.
All contacts are fully programmable for closure relative to 17 different drive variables
selected through the “CR1-4 Out Select” parameters.
Encoder Inputs
Requirements
Line Driver Encoder 5V DC or 8-15V DC Output.
Minimum Current – 10mA per Channel.
Quadrature or Pulse.
Single Ended or Differential.
Maximum Input Frequency – 250 kHz
Serial Communications Options
Remote I/O
Single drop remote I/O to Allen-Bradley PLCs and SLC 500. Supports full block transfer and
link mode discrete transfer.
RS232/422/485
DFI Protocol – DH485 Protocol – Customer Specific Protocol.
DeviceNet™
DeviceNet to SCANport module – Available for all drive ratings.
Flex™ I/O
Flex I/O to SCANport module – Available for all drive ratings.
SLC
SLC to SCANport module – Available for all drive ratings.
10
Function Description
Sensorless Vector Motor Control
New vector control adds exceptional torque performance to the 1336 PLUS II.
This powerful algorithm provides the following performance enhancements.
• Outstanding low speed torque at speeds as low as 15 rpm, providing a 120:1
constant torque speed range.
• Improved acceleration control can provide up to 250% breakaway/acceleration torque to move the toughest loads with ease.
• Solid “out-of-the-box” performance. Enhanced performance can be gained by programming the setup parameters with actual motor
nameplate values. Optimum results can be achieved by programming the actual amps required to generate no load flux and the actual
voltage needed for IR compensation. If these values are not known, setup procedures can determine the exact values.
• A fast accel mode is provided. Disabling the Adaptive Current Limit feature provides the lowest possible acceleration time for
low inertia applications.
• A fast flux-up mode is programmable to aid in acceleration with large motors.
• Selectable Volts/Hertz modes are also available. When selected, they provide full functionality
including Start Boost and Run Boost, Boost Slope and “Full Custom” V/Hz operation.
Process PI Control
Simple process control, monitoring a feedback device and adjusting drive output according to feedback requirements can be accomplished
with the 1336 PLUS II Proportional and integral gain adjustments plus feedback scaling, error inversion, output clamping and integrator
reset functions allow the Process PI function to control the output of the 1336 PLUS II based on the PI reference (setpoint) and the
PI feedback. If the feedback device indicates that the process is moving away from the desired setpoint, the PI software responds by
adjusting the drive output until the feedback again equals the setpoint. Selectable inputs provide “auto/manual” capability for open
loop threading operation. Programmable presets and preloads assure smooth transitions.
PI Reference
Select
Integral Term = 0
pi reference
PI Reference
PI Feedback
Select
PI Error
PI + Clamp
√
pi feedback
PI Config.sqrt_fdbk
–1
+
–
PI Feedback
∑
+
Process KI
s
Speed
Adder
∑
+
PI Config.reset_int
PI Config.inv_error
PI – Clamp
Process KP
PI Output
PI Output
Parameter 65
Freq Command
+32767
Master Frequency Reference
+
Compute
Speed
Speed
Command
Accel
Control
Speed
Ramp
+
∑
0
Output Frequency
+32767
0
–32767
speed ramp>0
–32767
PI Config.zero_clamp
11
Function Description
Encoder Feedback
For those applications that require excellent speed regulation,
the 1336 PLUS II offers optional encoder feedback. This option
provides closed loop speed regulation from no load to full load
of 0.1%. A feedback encoder and interface board (L4E, L5E or L6E*)
with encoder inputs is required.
* The encoder loss detection feature of the 1336 PLUS II
requires the use of L7E, L8E or L9E.
% of Speed
100
Encoder
99
Slip Comp
98
N one
97
0.1%
0.5%
3% Typical
96
95
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% of Load
Slip Compensation
To develop torque in an induction motor, rotor speed “slips” relative
to stator speed. The amount of slip is proportional to the motor
load. While this increased slip provides the necessary torque,
load speed is sacrificed. For those applications where this
speed decrease is unacceptable, the 1336 PLUS II offers Slip
Compensation. As load increases, the drive automatically increases
output frequency to provide needed motor slip without a decrease
in speed. The amount of compensation is proportional to the load
increase, allowing one setting for the entire speed range. The
1336 PLUS II Slip Compensation function can provide typical
speed regulation of 0.5%.
% of Speed
100
With Slip
Compensation
99
98
Without Slip
Compensation
97
96
95
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% of Load
• Slip compensation is based on programmed motor flux instead
of drive rated amps, providing more accurate speed regulation.
• Slip compensation is active for both steady state and
accel/decel conditions.
• Dynamic response to load changes is parameter adjustable.
• Slip compensation enhances torque performance at all speeds.
Flying Start
Some applications require that the drive “pick up” a spinning load at its current speed and direction, then accelerate or decelerate to the
actual commanded speed and direction. The 1336 PLUS II offers a programmable feature called Flying Start. This feature has the ability
to determine the speed and direction of a rotating motor and begin its output at that speed. The drive will then bring the motor to the
commanded speed. Flying start can be accomplished with or without a motor mounted encoder.
12
Function Description
Power Loss Ride-Thru
The 1336 PLUS II has the ability to ride through short power
interruptions. On loss of input power to the drive, the drive offers
two methods of operation.
Diagram 1
With the Line Loss Fault parameter disabled, if a power
interruption occurs (T1) the drive will continue to operate off stored
DC bus energy until bus voltage drops to 85% of its nominal value
(T2). At this point, the drive output is shut off, allowing the DC bus
to discharge more slowly. The drive will retain its logic and
operating status as long as bus voltage is above the absolute
minimum bus voltage (refer to Page 7). If bus voltage should fall
below this level (T5), the drive will trip and Undervolt Fault will be
displayed. If input power is restored before this minimum is
reached (T3) and bus voltage rises above the 85% level (T4), the
drive will restore output power to the motor and resume running.
Diagram 2
With the Line Loss Fault parameter enabled, if input power is lost
(T1) the drive will continue to operate until the bus voltage falls
below 85% of nominal (T2). At this point the drive output is turned
off and a 500 mS timer is started. One of the following conditions
will then occur:
1. The bus voltage will fall below minimum before the time expires
(T6). This will generate an Undervoltage Fault.
DIAGRAM 1
Output
Off
Logic
100% VBUS
85% VBUS
Minimum VBUS
Undervoltage Fault
(depends on [Low Bus Fault])
T3 T4 T5
T1 T2
T1 = Loss of Power
T2 = Bus Level at 85% of Nominal, Outputs Shut Off
T3 = Power Returned
T4 = Outputs Turned On
T5 = Minimum Bus Voltage Level, Undervoltage Fault Point
DIAGRAM 2
Output
Off
Output
Logic
100% VBUS
85% VBUS
Line Loss Fault
Minimum VBUS
Undervoltage Fault
(depends on [Low Bus Fault])
2. The bus voltage will remain below 85% but above minimum and
the timer expires (T5). This will generate a Line Loss Fault.
3. The input power is restored (T3) and the bus voltage rises above
the 85% level before the timer expires (T4). This allows the drive
to turn its output on and resume running.
Output
T1 T2
T3 T4 T6
T5
T1 = Loss of Power
T2 = Bus Level at 85% of Nominal, Outputs Shut Off
T3 = Power Returned
T4 = Outputs Turned On
T5 = 500mS Time Out, Line Loss Fault
T6 = Minimum Bus Voltage Level, Undervoltage Fault Point
Line Loss Restart
In the event that a line loss condition occurs, the 1336 PLUS II provides a variety of programmable selections to control the timing
and method of reconnecting the motor after power returns. Choices include:
• Use flying start to determine motor speed.
• Check for motor terminal voltage to determine motor speed.
• Read the encoder, if present.
• Reconnect at last known output frequency.
13
Function Description
Volts-per-Hertz
The 1336 PLUS II offers a fully programmable Volts-per-Hertz mode
that allows maximum performance for applications requiring
multiple motors on a common drive, particularly if the motors are
not of equal size and type (i.e. a 3.7 kW/5 HP and 11 kW/15 HP
motor on a 15 kW/20 HP drive).
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
Maximum
Maximum Voltage
Maximum Frequency
Motor Rated
Voltage
Break Voltage
Break Frequency
Start Boost
0
Frequency
0
Motor Rated
Maximum
Motor Overload Protection
Overload Patterns
No Derate
Time to Trip vs. Current (Firmware 4.01 & Up)
1000
100
% of Load
Motor I 2 t protection is separated from the drive power overload
feature. The electronic motor overload operates independently to
provide improved Class 10 protection. Operation at full load amps
will raise the overload to approximately 70-80% of its trip level.
Overloading beyond FLA will move the value towards tripping level
(100%) based on I 2 t Trip curves are provided for both hot and cold
states. Parameter settings include:
80
60
40
20
0
Min Derate
100
Time to Trip - Seconds
% of Load
100
80
60
40
20
0
Cold
10
Max Derate
Hot
100
% of Load
• Overload Amps from the motor nameplate FLA.
• Motor OL Fault parameter to disable the fault condition.
• In addition, Bit 14 (Motor OL Trip) of the Drive Alarm parameter is
high (1) any time the existing level of output current will cause an
Overload Fault to occur.
The overload feature remains speed sensitive with
3 derating choices:
• Max Derate is used for motors not designed for variable speed.
• Min Derate is used for motors with a 4:1 speed range (not
intended for operation below 25% of base Speed).
• No Derate is used for variable speed motors with a speed range
capability of 10:1 or better.
80
60
40
20
115%
1
0
0
25
50
75 100 125 150 175 200
% of Base Speed
1
10
Multiple of [Overload Amps]
Auto Economizer
This feature combines stator flux control with an economizer routine to help the end user save energy costs. The Auto Economizer monitors
drive current and compares it against the full load amps (Overload Amps) that the user has programmed into the drive. In load situations
(i.e. idle) where the actual current draw of the motor is significantly less than the programmed overload amps, the drive will automatically
begin reducing the output voltage to the motor. This minimizes flux current in a lightly loaded motor and results in a lower kW usage.
14
Function Description
Braking
Many applications require a “holding brake” function to stop
motor rotation between operations. The 1336 PLUS II provides a
programmable DC Hold level and DC Hold time to develop holding
torque in the motor after a ramp-to-stop.
Ramp-to-Stop
Vo
lt a
Volts/Speed
Spee
For applications that require a quick stopping time, the 1336 PLUS II
can “inject” a DC voltage into the motor for a programmed time to
brake the motor to a stop. While this does not take the place of an
external brake for emergency stopping, it is an effective stopping
method under normal operation.
DC Hold
Time
DC Hold Level
Time
Stop Command
Brake-to-Stop
Voltage
The drive is capable of extended or unlimited injection braking for
both stopping and holding a motor. It provides:
Volts/Speed
Speed
DC Hold
Time
• Injection braking at selectable levels for extended periods
up to 90 seconds.
DC Hold Level
• Extended Hold Braking (up to 90 seconds).
• Continuous (event ended) Hold Braking. This is accomplished by
setting the Stop mode to “Ramp to Hold”. In this mode, the drive
will decelerate according to the programmed decel ramp. When
the drive reaches zero Hertz output, it will supply programmed
current for hold braking per the DC Hold Level parameter
(limited to 70% of drive rating) until;
ge
d
Time
Stop Command
Ramp-to-Hold
Vo
lt a
Volts/Speed
Spee
Reissuing a Start Command
at this point will cause
the drive to Restart
and Ramp as
shown
ge
d
DC Hold Level
a) a Start command is issued,
or
b) the Enable input is opened.
Stop Command
Time
Opening Enable Input instead
of reissuing a Start Command
will cause drive to Stop
Reset/Run
The 1336 PLUS II offers the ability to automatically reset a fault (if the condition that causes the fault is no longer present) and restart.
Both the number of reset attempts (0-9) and the time between reset attempts (0-30 Sec.) are programmable. If the condition causing the
fault is still present when the number of “reset/run tries” is exceeded, the drive will shut down and issue a "Max Retries Exceeded" Fault.
This feature will not operate for ground faults or shorted output faults.
Owners
The 1336 PLUS II displays which of the available adapters currently
“owns” certain control functions. To avoid conflict, some owners
are exclusive (only one device can issue a direction command), while
others can have multiple control (many devices can simultaneously
issue a start command). Owner displays are excellent diagnostic tools,
displaying precisely where drive control commands are coming from.
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Adapter 1 currently
controlling direction
Typical Owner Direction Command
Masks
All external control connections to the 1336 PLUS II are made through
a multi-connection communication bus called SCANport. A Frame
drives have 5 available adapter ports while B Frame & larger drives
have 6 ports. With the possibility of many devices able to issue drive
control functions (start, stop, reverse, speed reference, etc.), the
1336 PLUS II offers a mask for each control function that gives the user
complete flexibility to lock out any function (except stop) from any port.
1
1
Typical Jog Mask
1
0
1
1
1
Allows jog from Adapter 1
Denies jog from Adapter 3
15
Function Description
Traverse Function
Traverse Period
P-Jump (+)
40
P-Jump (–) Maximum Traverse (+)
Output
Reference
Maximum Traverse (–)
20
Hertz
The 1336 PLUS II output frequency can be programmed to modulate
around a set frequency. This is accomplished by programming three
parameters to develop an inertia compensated triangular waveform
– Traverse Period, Max Traverse, and P Jump. In surface driven
winding applications, the waveform developed can be used by
traverse drives to perform the traverse function electronically.
A traverse drive will move the thread back and forth in a diamond
pattern to distribute the thread evenly across a tube surface. To
prevent a build up of thread at the same points on the surface, this
pattern must be altered. This can be accomplished by continuously
varying the speed of the traverse in a cyclical manner over a
specified speed range. With the use of inertia compensation,
the result is a series of distributed diamond patterns over the
entire tube surface.
Traverse
0
P-Jump
–20
10
20
30
40
50
60
Seconds
Run On Power Up
For applications that require unattended operation, the 1336 PLUS II
offers the ability to resume running once power is restored after a
power outage. If "Run On Power Up" is activated and input power
is lost, when power is restored the drive will automatically
restart and run at current command speed if all required signals
are present (Enable, Auxiliary, Not-Stop and Start).
Output
Frequency
Power Lost
Power Restored
Time
4-20mA Loss Select
Many control systems issue a 4-20 mA control signal for the drive
to use as a speed reference. The drive will run at minimum speed
with a 4 mA signal and maximum speed with a 20 mA signal. The
drive can also invert this signal to run minimum speed at 20 mA
and maximum speed at 4 mA. Since a minimum signal of 4 mA is
required, the drive must have a “fall back” instruction in the event
of a signal loss (failed transducer or broken wire). The 1336 PLUS II
contains a “loss select” parameter that offers five choices for
signal failure mode.
1. Stop the drive and issue a fault.
2. Go to minimum speed and issue a warning.
3. Go to maximum speed and issue a warning.
4. Maintain speed and issue a warning.
5. Go to a preset speed and issue a warning.
16
Drive at Command Frequency
Output
Frequency
Drive Ramps to Preset Speed
Signal Loss –– Warning Issued
Time
Function Description
Skip Frequencies
Frequency
Actual
Command
Frequency
i ve
Dr
Many mechanical systems have resonant frequencies that can
cause severe vibration. If theses systems are run at these speeds
continuously, this vibration can cause mechanical breakdowns.
The 1336 PLUS II offers three programmable Skip Frequencies
that prevent the drive from running continuously at resonant
speeds. An additional parameter allows a programmable Skip
Bandwidth around the skip frequencies
Frequency
Skip Band
Skip Frequency
Time
Process Display
In order to provide complete flexibility in monitoring drive
performance, the 1336 PLUS II offers a Process Mode for the
liquid crystal super-twist display on the Human Interface Module.
This feature provides two lines of 16 characters each that can
display any two drive parameters scaled into user selectable units.
Each line uses 8 value display characters and 8 programmable
text characters to create the process display. Simple keystrokes
can designate the process display as the standard display shown
at power up.
Fault Buffer
The 1336 PLUS II contains a fault buffer that records the last four
faults the drive experienced. The buffer stores faults in a first-in
first-out manner. Additional diagnostic parameters are listed in
the Diagnostic Group (Refer to the Parameter List on Page 18).
Next Fault
4th Fault
Buffer 0
3rd Fault
Buffer 1
2nd Fault
Buffer 2
1st Fault
Buffer 3
17
Parameter List
The 1336 PLUS II uses an extensive set of parameters divided into
groups for ease of programming. Grouping replaces a sequentially
numerical parameter list with functional parameter groups that
increase operator efficiency and help reduce programming time.
Group/Param.
Metering
Output Current
Output Voltage
Output Power
DC Bus Voltage
Output Freq
Freq Command
Anlg In 0 Freq
Anlg In 1 Freq
Anlg In 2 Freq
Encoder Freq
Pulse Freq
MOP Freq
Heatsink Temp
Power OL Count
Motor OL Count
Last Fault
Torque Current
Flux Current
% Output Power
% Output Curr
Elapsed Run Time
Setup
Input Mode
Freq Select 1
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Select 1
Current Limit
Current Lmt Sel
Adaptive I Lim
Overload Mode
Overload Amps
VT Scaling
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Hertz
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Amps
Advanced Setup
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
PWM Frequency
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Sync Time
Stop Select 1
DC Hold Time
DC Hold Level
Hold Level Sel
Bus Limit En
Motor Type
Stop Select 2
KP Amps
Speed Brake En*
Frequency Setup
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Jog Frequency
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
MOP Increment
Save MOP Ref
Freq Ref SqRoot
18
No.
Disp. Units Min./Max. Values
Default
54
1
23
53
66
65
138
139
140
63
254
137
70
84
202
4
162
163
3
2
279
0.1A
1 Volt
1 kW
1 Volt
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
1° C
1%
1%
Fault #
0.1A
0.1A
1%
1%
0.1 Hr
0/200% Rtd. Drv. Out. Current
0/200% Rtd. Drv. Out. Volts
±200% Rtd. Drv. Out. Power
0/200% DC Bus Volt Max.
±400.00 Hz
±400.00 Hz
0.00/400.00 Hz
0.00/400.00 Hz
0.00/400.00 Hz
0.00/400.00 Hz
0.00/400.00 Hz
0.00/400.00 Hz
0/255° C
0/200%
0/200%
None
±200% Drive Rating
±200% Drive Rating
±200% Drv. Rated Out. Power
0/200% Rated Drv. Out. Curr.
0/6553.5
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
0
241
5
7
8
16
19
10
36
232
227
37
38
203
177
178
190
191
Mode #
Settings
0.1 Second
0.1 Second
1 Hertz
1 Hertz
Settings
1%
Settings
Settings
Settings
0.1A
Settings
1 RPM
1 Hertz
1 Volt
1 Amp
None
Selection Parameter
0.0/3600.0 Sec
0.0/3600.0 Sec
0/120 Hz
25/400 Hz
Selection Parameter
20/160% Rated Amps
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
20/115% Drive Rated Amps
Selection Parameter
60/24000 RPM
1/400 Hz
0/2 x Drive Rated Volts
0/2 x Drive Rated Amps
Status
Adapter 1
10.0 Sec
10.0 Sec
0 Hz
60 Hz
Coast
150%
Current Lmt
Enabled
No Derate
115% Drv. Rtd.
Disabled
1750 RPM
60 Hz
Drv. Rated Volts
Drv. Rated Amps
16
19
45
30
31
307
10
12
13
231
11
41
52
193
319
1 Hertz
0/120 Hz
1 Hertz
25/400 Hz
2 kHz
1/8 kHz (A & B Frame)
2 kHz
1/6 kHz (C Frame & up)
0.1 Second 0.0/3600.0 Sec
0.1 Second 0.0/3600.0 Sec
0.0 Second 0.0/6000.0 Sec
Display Drive None
1 Second 0/90.0 Sec
1%
0/150 %
Settings
Selection Parameter
Settings
Selection Parameter
Settings
Selection Parameter
Settings
Selection Parameter
NA
25/400
Settings
Selection Parameter
0 Hz
60 Hz
Based on Drv Type
Based on Drv Type
10.0 Sec
10.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
Coast
0.0 Sec
100 %
DC Hold Lvl
Disabled
Induction
Coast
100
Disabled
5
6
24
27
28
29
73
74
75
76
32
33
34
35
22
230
229
Settings
Selection Parameter
Settings
Selection Parameter
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hertz
0.0/400.0 Hz
1 Hertz
0/400 Hz
1 Hertz
0/400 Hz
1 Hertz
0/400 Hz
1 Hertz
0/15 Hz
0.1 Hertz/Sec 0/78% [Max. Freq]/Sec
Settings
Selection Parameter
Settings
Selection Parameter
Adapter 1
Preset 1
10.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
0 Hz
1.1 Hz/Sec
Disabled
Disabled
Group/Param.
No.
Disp. Units
Frequency Setup (continued)
Pulse In Scale
264
Factor
Encoder PPR
46
Factor
Feature Select
Dwell Frequency
43
0.1 Hertz
Dwell Time
44
1 Second
Speed Control
77
Settings
Slip @ F.L.A.
42
0.1 Hertz
Slip Comp Gain
195
None
Run On Power Up 14
Settings
Reset/Run Tries
85
1 Try
Reset/Run Time
15
0.1 Second
S Curve Enable
57
Settings
S Curve Time
56
0.1 Second
Language
47
Settings
Flying Start En
155
Settings
FStart Forward
156
1 Hz
FStart Reverse
157
1 Hz
LLoss Restart
228
Settings
LLoss Mode
256
Settings
LLoss Volts
320
1 Volt
Loss Recover
321
1 Volt
Ride Thru Volts
322
1 Volt
Min Bus Volts
323
1 Volt
Traverse Inc
78
0.01 Sec
Traverse Dec
304
0.01 Sec
Max Traverse
79
0.01 Hz
P Jump
80
0.01 Hz
Bus Regulation
288
Settings
Load Loss Det
290
Settings
Load Loss Level
291
1%
Load Loss Time
292
1 Second
Bus Reg Level**/
325
1 Volt
Max Bus Volts*
Digital I/O
Input Mode
241
Mode #
TB3 Term 22
242
Settings
TB3 Term 23
243
Settings
TB3 Term 24
244
Settings
TB3 Term 26
245
Settings
TB3 Term 27
246
Settings
TB3 Term 28
247
Settings
Input Status
55
Settings
CR1 Out Select
158
Settings
CR2 Out Select
174
Settings
CR3 Out Select
175
Settings
CR4 Out Select
176
Settings
Dig Out Freq
159
0.01 Hz
Dig Out Current
160
0%
Dig Out Torque
161
0.1A
Dig At Temp
267
1° C
PI Max Error
293
0.01 Hz
Pulse Out Select
280
Settings
Pulse Out Scale
281
Factor
Pulse In Scale
264
Factor
327
0.01 Sec
At Time*
Settings
Remote CR Output* 326
Analog I/O
Anlg In 0 Lo
237
0.1 %
Anlg In 0 Hi
238
0.1 %
Anlg In 1 Lo
239
0.1%
Anlg In 1 Hi
240
0.1%
Anlg In 2 Lo
248
0.1%
Anlg In 2 Hi
249
0.1%
Analog Trim En
90
Settings
Anlg Signal Loss
250
Settings
4-20mA Loss Sel
150
Settings
Anlg Out 0 Sel
25
Settings
Anlg Out 0 Offset 154
Disabled
Anlg Out 0 Abs
233
Disabled
Anlg Out 0 Lo
234
0.1%
Anlg Out 0 Hi
235
0.1%
Anlg Out 1 Sel
274
Settings
Anlg Out 1 Abs
277
Enabled
Anlg Out 1 Offset 278
Enabled
Anlg Out 1 Lo
275
0.1%
Anlg Out 1 Hi
276
0.1%
Slot A Option
252
Settings
Slot B Option
253
Settings
*Firmware 3.001 & later
**Firmware 4.001 & later
Min./Max. Values
Default
1/4096
1/4096
1024 PPR
1024 PPR
0.0/7.0 Hz
0/10 Sec
Selection Parameter
0.0/10.0 Hz
1/40
Selection Parameter
0/9
0.5/30.0 Sec
Selection Parameter
0.0/1800.0 Sec
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
0/400 Hz
0/400 Hz
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
40/80/100 Volts/200/400/500 Volts
20/40/50 Volts/200/400/500 Volts
40/80/100 Volts/200/400/500 Volts
100/200/250 Volts/200/400/500 Volts
0.00/30.00 Sec
0.00/30.00 Sec
0.00/50% [Maximum Freq]
0.00/25% [Maximum Freq]
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
0/100 %
0/30 Sec
358/716/895 Volts
403/807/1009 Volts
0.0 Hz
0 Sec
Slip Comp
1.0 Hz
1
Disabled
0 Tries
1.0 Sec
Disabled
0.0 Sec
English
Disabled
60 Hz
0 Hz
Track Volts
LoBus>Off
59/117/146 Volts
29/59/73 Volts
29/59/73 Volts
194/388/485 Volts
0.00 Sec
0.00 Sec
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Disabled
Disabled
0%
0 Sec
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
0.00 Hz/ [Maximum Freq]
0/200%
0.0/200% of [Rated Amps]
0/255° C
±400.00 Hz
Selection Parameter
1/4096
1/4096
0.00/360.00
None
Status
Rev/For Input 3
Jog Input 4
Aux Fault Input 5
Spd Sel 3 Input 6
Spd Sel 2 Input 7
Spd Sel 1 Input 8
At Speed
Running
Fault
Alarm
0.00 Hz
0%
0.0A
0
None
Frequency
1024 PPR
1024 PPR
0.00 Sec
xxxx0000
±300.0%
±300.0%
±300.0%
±300.0%
±300.0%
±300.0%
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
±300.0%
±300.0%
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
±300.0%
±300.0%
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
0.0%
100.0%
0.0%
100.0%
0.0%
100.0%
Disabled
Disabled
Min/Alarm
Frequency
Disabled
Enabled
0.0%
100.0%
Current
Enabled
Disabled
0.0%
100.0%
Standard
Standard
358/716/895 Volts
Parameter List
Group/Param.
Faults
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
Fault Buffer 2
Fault Buffer 3
Clear Fault
Cur Lim Trip En
Shear Pin Fault
Motor OL Fault
Motor Therm Flt
Line Loss Fault
Blwn Fuse Flt
Low Bus Fault
Fault Data
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Fault Frequency
Fault Status 1
Fault Status 2
Fault Alarms 1
Fault Alarms 2
Flt Clear Mode
Ground Warning
Phase Loss Mode*
Phase Loss Level*
Precharge Fault*
Diagnostics
Drive Status 1
Drive Status 2
Application Sts
Drive Alarm 1
Drive Alarm 2
Latched Alarms 1
Latched Alarms 2
Input Status
Freq Source
Freq Command
Drive Direction
Stop Mode Used
Motor Mode
Power Mode
Output Pulses
Current Angle
Heatsink Temp
Set Defaults
DC Bus Memory
Meas. Volts
EEPROM Cksum
Ratings
Rated Volts
Rated Amps
Rated kW
Firmware Ver.
Cntrl Board Rev
Rated CT Amps
Rated CT kW
Rated VT Amps
Rated VT kW
Drive Type
Masks
Direction Mask
Start Mask
Jog Mask
Reference Mask
Accel Mask
Decel Mask
Fault Mask
MOP Mask
Traverse Mask
Sync Mask
Logic Mask
Local Mask
Alarm Mask 1
Alarm Mask 2
Owners
Stop Owner
Direction Owner
Start Owner
Jog Owner
Reference Owner
Accel Owner
Decel Owner
Fault Owner
No.
Disp. Units Min./Max. Values
Default
86
87
88
89
51
82
226
201
268
40
81
91
207
143
144
145
146
286
173
287
39
204
330
331
332
Fault Code
Fault Code
Fault Code
Fault Code
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
Fault Code
Settings
Settings
Settings
Param. #
Settings
Settings
0.01 Hertz
Bit 1/0
Fault Code
Bit 1/0
Fault Code
Settings
Settings
Settings
0.1 Volts
Settings
Fault Storage
Fault Storage
Fault Storage
Fault Storage
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Fault Storage
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
1/255
Read Only
Read Only
0.00/400.00 Hz
Read Only
Fault Storage
Read Only
Fault Storage
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
5.1/10.1/12.7Volts/22.5/45.0/56.2 Volts
Selection Parameter
None
None
None
None
Ready
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
9.0/18.0/22.5 Volts
Enabled
59
236
316
60
269
205
270
55
62
65
69
26
141
142
67
72
70
64
212
272
172
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Settings
0.01 Hertz
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
1 Pulse
1 Deg.
1° C.
Settings
1 Volt
1 Volt
None
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
±400.00
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
0/65535
Read Only
0/255° C
Selection Parameter
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Use Last
None
None
Coast
None
None
None
None
None
Ready
None
None
None
147
170
171
71
251
148
149
198
199
61
1 Volt
0.1 A
kW
None
None
0.1A
kW
0.1A
kW
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Drive Rating
Drive Rating
Drive Rating
0.00
0.00
Drive Rating
Drive Rating
Drive Rating
Drive Rating
Drive Rating
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
305
308
92
93
206
271
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
01111110
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
01111111
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Group/Param.
No.
Owners (continued)
MOP Owner
110
Traverse Owner
306
Sync Owner
309
Local Owner
179
Adapter I/O
Data In (8)
111-118
Data Out (8)
119-126
Alt Type 2 Cmd
315
Process Display
Process 1 Par
127
Process 1 Scale
128
Process 1 Txt 1-8
129-136
Process 2 Par
180
Process 2 Scale
181
Process 2 Txt 1-8
182-189
Encoder Feedback
Speed Control
77
Encoder Type
152
Encoder PPR
46
Maximum Speed
151
Motor Poles
153
Speed Kl
165
Speed KP
164
Speed Error
166
Speed Integral
167
Speed Adder
168
Slip Adder
255
Motor NP RPM
177
Motor NP Hertz
178
Encoder Counts
283
Enc Count Scale
282
Encoder Loss Sel
284
Encoder Freq
63
Max Enc Counts* 328
Process PI
Speed Control
77
PI Config
213
PI Status
214
PI Ref Select
215
PI Fdbk Select
216
PI Reference
217
PI Feedback
218
PI Error
219
PI Output
220
KI Process
221
KP Process
222
PI Neg Limit
223
PI Pos Limit
224
PI Preload
225
Motor Control
Control Select
9
Flux Amps Ref
192
IR Drop Volts
194
Flux Up Time
200
Start Boost
48
Run Boost
83
Boost Slope
169
Break Voltage
50
Break Frequency
49
Base Voltage
18
Base Frequency
17
Maximum Voltage 20
Run/Accel Volts
317
Sync Loss Sel
310
Sync Loss Gain
311
Sync Loss Comp
313
Sync Loss Time
312
PWM Comp Time ** 333
334
Break Freq**
Disp. Units Min./Max. Values
Default
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
None
None
None
None
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Parameter # None
Parameter # None
Settings
Selection Parameter
0
0
Disabled
Parameter #
Numeric
ASCII Code
Parameter #
Numeric
ASCII Code
None
±327.67
None
None
±327.67
None
1
+1.00
Volts
54
+1.00
Amps
Settings
Settings
Factor
1 Hertz
1 Pole
Numeric
Numeric
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
1 RPM
1 Hertz
1 Count
Settings
0.01 Hertz
1 Count
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
1/4096
0/400 Hz
Read Only
0/20000
0/20000
±8.33% [Base Frequency]
±8.33% [Base Frequency]
±8.33% [Base Frequency]
±8.33% [Base Frequency]
60/24000 RPM
1/400 Hz
±32767
0/4096
Selection Parameter
0.00/400.00 Hz
0/32767
Slip Comp
Quadrature
1024 PPR
400 Hz
None
100
0
None
None
None
None
1750 RPM
60 Hz
0
None
Disabled
None
0
Settings
Bit 1/0
Bit 1/0
Settings
Settings
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
N/A
N/A
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
Selection Parameter
0/1
Read Only
Selection Parameter
Selection Parameter
±400.00 Hz
±400.00 Hz
±400.00 Hz
±400.00 Hz
0/1024
0/1024
±400.00 Hz
±400.00 Hz
±8.33 [Max Freq]
Slip Comp
00000000
None
Preset 1
Analog In 1
None
None
None
None
128
256
–8.33% [Max Freq]
+8.33% [Max Freq]
0.00 Hz
Settings
0.1A
1 Volt
0.1 Sec
1 Volt
1 Volt
None
1 Volt
1 Hertz
1 Volt
1 Hertz
1 Volt
1%
Settings
Numeric
1 Volt
1 Sec
None
0.01 Hz
Selection Parameter
0.0/75% Drive VT Rtd. Amps
0/25% Drive Rated Voltage
0.0/5.0 Sec
0/9.5% Drive Rated Voltage
0/9.5% Drive Rated Voltage
1.0/8.0
0/50% Drive Rated Voltage
0/120 Hz
25/120% Drive Rated Voltage
25/400 Hz
25/120% Drive Rated Voltage
50%/100%
Selection Parameter
0/100
0/25% of Drive Rtd. Volts
1/30 Sec
20/90
0/30 Hz
Sens Vector
0.0A
0 Volts
0.0 Sec
0 Volts
0 Volts
1.5
25% Drive Rtd. V
25% [Max. Freq]
Drive Rtd. Volts
60 Hz
Drive Rtd. Volts
100%
Disabled
40
0 Volts
5 Sec
80
0 Hz
*Firmware 3.001 & later
**Firmware 4.001 & later
19
Fault List
Over 40 faults can be displayed through the Human Interface Module. The display indicates a fault by showing a brief text statement
relating to the fault that will be displayed until a drive reset is initiated.
Fault
No.
Display Name
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Auxiliary Fault
Power Loss Fault
Undervolt Fault
Overvolt Fault
Motor Stall Fault
Overload Fault
Overtemp Fault
Open Pot Fault
Serial Fault
Op Error Fault
Overcurrent Flt
Ground Fault
Option Error
Motor Thermistor
Bipolar Dir Flt
19
22
23
24
26
29
30
32
33
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
61
62
63
64
65
66
68
Precharge Fault
DSP Reset Fault
Loop Overrn Fault
Motor Mode Fault
Power Mode Fault
Hertz Err Fault
Hertz Sel Fault
EEPROM Fault
Max Retries Fault
Neg Slope Fault
Diag C Lim Flt
Phase U Fault
Phase V Fault
Phase W Fault
UV Short Fault
UW Short Fault
VW Short Fault
Xsistr Desat Flt
Reprogram Fault
Input Phase Flt
Poles Calc Fault
Bgnd 10ms Over
Fgnd 10ms Over
EE Init Read
EE Init Value
Temp Sense Open
Precharge Open
Ground Warning
Blwn Fuse Flt
Mult Prog Input
Ill Prog Input
Shear Pin Fault
Power Overload
Adptr Freq Err
EEPROM Checksum
ROM or RAM Fit
20
Fault Description
The auxiliary input interlock is open
DC bus voltage remained below 85% of nominal for longer than 500ms
DC Bus voltage fell below the minimum value
Dc bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Current remained over 150% of [Rated Amps] for more than 4 seconds
Internal electronic overload trip
Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value of 90° C (195° F)
An external pot is connected and the common side of the pot is open
A SCANport adapter has been disconnected and the [Logic Mask] bit for that adapter is set to “1”
A SCANport device requests a Read or Write of data type not supported
Overcurrent is detected in instantaneous overcurrent trip circuit
A current path to earth ground in excess of 100A has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals
An analog option board has been installed in the wrong slot
An analog option board with thermistor input is installed and the value at the terminals is less than 60 ohms or greater than 3300 ohms
3 Wire-Bipolar input is the active frequency reference and direction control is not possible
2 Wire-Run Forward or Run Reverse commands attempt direction control, but bipolar input is not masked from direction control
The precharge device was open 20ms after the end of a line loss condition or the bus charging alarm remains on for 20 seconds
Power-up has been attempted with an Open Stop contact or Closed Start contact
An overrun of the 2.5ms control loop has occurred
A fault has been detected originating from the Control Board
The internal power mode variable received an incorrect value
This fault indicates that there is not a valid operating frequency
A frequency select parameter has been programmed with an out-of-range value
EEPROM is being programmed and will not write a new value
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of tries
Drive software detected a portion of the v/hz curve with a negative slope
The [Cur Lim Trip En] parameter was enabled
A phase-to-ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase
A phase-to-ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase
A phase-to-ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase
Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals
Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals
Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals
Output transistor(s) operating in the active region instead of desaturation. (Frame C & Above)
The drive was commanded to write default values to EEPROM
The drive is operated on single phase power
Generated if the calculated value of [Motor Poles] is less than 2 or greater than 32
Microprocessor loop fault
Microprocessor loop fault
Trouble reading EEPROM during initialization or gate drive board needs replacing
Stored parameter value out of range on initialization
Heatsink thermistor is open or malfunctioning
The precharge circuit was commanded to close, but was detected to be open
A current path to earth ground in excess of 2A has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals
The bus fuse in 30kW (40 HP) and up drives has blown
A single source input function has been programmed to more than one input or more than one “Run Reverse” input
[Fault Data] = 98: “3 Wire” is selected as the [Input Mode] and one or more digital inputs are programmed to “Run Reverse”
Programmed [Current Limit] amps has been exceeded
The drive rating of 150% for 1 minute has been exceeded
The SCANport adapter sent an illegal frequency reference to the drive
The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the EEPROM data
Internal power-up ROM or RAM tests have not executed properly
Pre-Installation
1336 PLUS II Pre-Installation
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume
responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper
installation of this drive or associated equipment.
A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment exists if codes are ignored during installation.
21
Pre-Installation
Features
IP
20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions – Frames A1 Through A4
A
Y
Z
C Max.
D
AA E B
Mounting Hole Detail
7.0 (0.28)
7.0 (0.28)
12.7 (0.50)
BB
12.7 (0.50)
CC
Frame
Three-Phase Rating 1, 2
500-600V
Reference
380-480V
200-240V
–
A1
0.37-1.2 kW
0.37-0.75 kW
0.5-1.5 HP
0.5-1 HP
–
A2
1.5-2.2 kW
1.2-1.5 kW
2-3 HP
1.5-2 HP
–
A3
3.7 kW
2.2-3.7 kW
5 HP
3-5 HP
0.75-15 kW
A4
5.5-15 kW *
–
1-20 HP
7.5-20 HP
–
B1/B2
11-22 kW *
5.5-11 kW
–
15-30 HP
7.5-15 HP
18.5-45 kW
C
30-45 kW
15-22 kW
25-60 HP
40-60 HP
20-30 HP
56-93 kW
D
45-112 kW
30-45 kW
75-125 HP
60-150 HP
40-60 HP
112-187 kW
E
112-187 kW
56-93 kW
150-300 HP
150-250 HP
75-125 HP
261-298 kW
F
187-336 kW
–
350-400 HP
250-450 HP
224-448 kW
G
187-448 kW
–
300-600 HP
250-600 HP
* Use care when choosing Frame Reference - Some ratings may
exist in another frame size.
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
Bottom View Will Vary with HP – See Bottom View Dimensions
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
A
215.9
(8.50)
215.9
(8.50)
215.9
(8.50)
260.0
(10.24)
B
290.0
(11.42)
290.0
(11.42)
290.0
(11.42)
350.0
(13.78)
C Max.
160.0
(6.30)
180.5
(7.10)
207.0
(8.15)
212.0
(8.35)
D
185.2
(7.29)
185.2
(7.29)
185.2
(7.29)
230.0
(9.06)
E
275.0
(10.83)
275.0
(10.83)
275.0
(10.83)
320.0
(12.60)
1 Refer to the Derating Guidelines on Pages 56-60 for derating information.
22
Y
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
Z
7.5
(0.30)
7.5
(0.30)
7.5
(0.30)
15.35
(0.60)
AA
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
2 kW/HP are constant torque (CT) ratings.
BB
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
133.0
(5.23)
CC
85.3
(3.36)
85.3
(3.36)
85.3
(3.36)
86.0
(3.39)
Shipping
Weights
4.31
(9.5)
5.49
(12.1)
6.71
(14.8)
15.90
(35.0 )
Pre-Installation
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions – Frames B, C, D
A
Y
C Max.
Z
G
D
F
Mounting Hole Detail
(Frames B & C)
7.1 (0.28)
7.1 (0.28)
12.7 (0.50)
12.7 (0.50)
AA E B
Mounting Hole Detail
(Frame D)
10.4 (0.41) Dia.
BB
14.7 (0.58)
19.0 (0.75) Dia.
CC
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
Frame D
Frames B & C
Bottom View Will Vary with HP
See Bottom View Dimensions
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference A
B1/B2
276.4
(10.88)
C
301.8
(11.88)
D
381.5
(15.02)
B
476.3
(18.75)
701.0
(27.60)
1240.0
(48.82)
C Max.
225.0
(8.86)
225.0
(8.86)
270.8
(10.66)
D
212.6
(8.37)
238.0
(9.37)
325.9
(12.83)
E
461.0
(18.15)
685.8
(27.00)
1216.2
(47.88)
F
131.6
(5.18)
131.6
(5.18)
81.3
(3.20)
G
Encl.
93.5
(3.68)
93.5
(3.68)
189.5
(7.46)
Open
88.9
(3.50)
88.9
(3.50)
184.9
(7.28)
Y
32.00
(1.26)
32.00
(1.26)
27.94
(1.10)
Z
7.6
(0.30)
7.6
(0.30)
11.94
(0.47)
AA
131.1
(5.16)
131.1
(5.16)
131.1
(5.16)
BB
180.8
(7.12)
374.7
(14.75)
688.6
(27.11)
CC
71.9
(2.83)
71.9
(2.83)
83.6
(3.29)
Shipping
Weight
22.7 kg
(50 lbs.)
38.6 kg
(85 lbs.)
108.9 kg
(240 lbs.)
23
Pre-Installation
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame E
A
Y
Z
C Max.
D
133.4
(5.25)
37.9
(1.49)
Mounting Hole Detail
10.4 (0.41) Dia.
AA
17.0 (0.67)
E B
19.0 (0.75) Dia.
BB
See Bottom View Dimensions for Details
CC
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference
E – Enclosed
E – Open
24
A
511.0
(20.12)
511.0
(20.12)
B
1498.6
(59.00)
1498.6
(59.00)
C Max.
424.4
(16.71)
372.6
(14.67)
D
477.5
(18.80)
477.5
(18.80)
E
1447.8
(57.00)
1447.8
(57.00)
Y
16.8
(0.66)
16.8
(0.66)
Z
40.1
(1.61)
40.1
(1.61)
AA
195.0
(7.68)
138.4
(5.45)
BB
901.4
(35.49)
680.0
(26.77)
CC
151.9
(5.98)
126.3
(4.97)
Shipping
Weight
186
(410)
163
(360)
Pre-Installation
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame F
635.0
(25.00)
Removable Lifting Angle
Open Chassis
487.7 (19.20)
63.5 (2.50)
762.0
(30.00)
252.7
(9.95)
2286.0
(90.00)
37.9
(1.49)
193.0
(7.60)
501.7
(19.75)
1219.2
(48.00)
Fan
Vertical
CL
711.2
(28.00)
527.1
(20.75)
19.1
(0.75)
274.8
(10.82)
31.5
(1.24)
196.9
(7.75)
108.0 (4.25) x 158.8 (6.25)
Removable Plate for
Cable Access (1 each side)
698.5
(27.50)
Conduit
Access Area
158.8
(6.25)
Fan Horiz. CL
82.6 (3.25)
298.5
(11.75)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
See page 2–1 for Mounting Information.
Bottom View
50.8
(2.00)
Approximate Shipping Weight (drive & pallet):
415.0 kg (915 lbs.)
25
Pre-Installation
Open Dimensions – Frame F “Roll-In” Chassis
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
635.0
(25.00)
1543.3
(60.76)
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
TE
R-L1
S-L2
T-L3
PE
U-M1
717.6
(28.25)
26
V-M2
W-M3
463.6
(18.25)
Pre-Installation
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame G
63.5 (2.50)
Removable Lifting Angle
Open Chassis Dimensions
Depth = 508.3 (20.01)
Weight = 453.6 kg (1000 lbs.)
117.3
(4.62)
2324.1
(91.50)
1524.0
(60.00)
19.3
(0.76)
648.0
(25.51)
Important: Two (2) 725 CFM fans are
required if an open type drive is
mounted in a user supplied
enclosure.
762.0
(30.00)
635.0
(25.00)
Conduit
Access Area
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
See Bottom View Dimensions for Details
27
Pre-Installation
IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions
A
See Detail A
D
12.4 (0.49)
C
F
G
H
See
Detail B
E
B
7.9 (0.31)
7.1 (0.28) Dia.
12.7 (0.50)
12.7 (0.50)
14.3 (0.56) Dia.
Typical Top and Bottom
Detail A
12.7 (0.50) Dia.
Drive
Heatsink
19.1 (0.75)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) at 200-240V AC
11 kW (15 HP) at 380-480V AC
B2 7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) at 200-240V AC
15-22 kW (20-30 HP) at 380-480V AC
C
28
A
430.0
(16.93)
430.0
(16.93)
430.0
(16.93)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
19.1 (0.75) Dia.
Detail B
B
525.0
(20.67)
525.0
(20.67)
525.0
(20.67)
650.0
(25.59)
650.0
(25.59)
900.0
(35.43)
1200.0
(47.24)
C
350.0
(13.78)
350.0
(13.78)
350.0
(13.78)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
D
404.9
(15.94)
404.9
(15.94)
404.9
(15.94)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
E
500.1
(19.69)
500.1
(19.69)
500.1
(19.69)
625.1
(24.61)
625.1
(24.61)
875.0
(34.45)
1174.5
(46.22)
F
250.0
(9.84)
250.0
(9.84)
250.0
(9.84)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
G
N/A
H
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
Approx. Ship
Weight
16.8
(37.0)
17.9
(39.4)
18.6
(41.0)
39.5
(87.0)
44.7
(98.5)
56.5
(124.5)
80.7
(178.0)
Pre-Installation
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions – Frames A-C
Frames A1 through A4
S
R
Fans are present on these drives
Input
Voltage
230
460
Frame
A4
A4
575
A4
Catalog
Number
F75
F75
F100
F150
F200
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
Q
22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
P
kW/HP
Rating
5.5 (7.5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
22.2/28.6 (0.88/1.13)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
N M L
Fans will be present on A4 Frame
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
L
111.8
(4.40)
132.3
(5.21)
158.8
(6.25)
164.0
(6.45)
M
105.4
(4.15)
126.0
(4.96)
152.4
(6.00)
164.0
(6.45)
N
86.3
(3.40)
106.9
(4.21)
133.4
(5.25)
139.0
(5.47)
P
31.0
(1.22)
31.0
(1.22)
31.0
(1.22)
27.0
(1.06)
Q
69.1
(2.72)
69.1
(2.72)
69.1
(2.72)
65.0
(2.56)
R
102.1
(4.02)
102.1
(4.02)
102.1
(4.02)
97.0
(3.82)
S
135.4
(5.33)
135.4
(5.33)
135.4
(5.33)
128.7
(5.07)
Frames B and C
S
R
Q
28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
P
22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
M L
Frame
Reference
B1/B2
C
L
181.6
(7.15)
181.6
(7.15)
M
167.1
(6.58)
167.1
(6.58)
P
112.8
(4.44)
119.1
(4.69)
Q
163.6
(6.44)
182.6
(7.19)
R
214.4
(8.44)
233.4
(9.19)
S
249.9
(9.84)
275.3
(10.84)
29
Pre-Installation
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions – Frames D-G
Frame D
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
62.7/76.2 (2.47/3.00)
Conduit Knockout - 2 Plcs.
343.9 (13.54)
261.4 (10.29)
34.9 (1.38)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
144.0 (5.67)
52.1 (2.05)
34.9/50.0 (1.38/1.97)
Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
198.1
(7.80)
169.4
(6.67)
131.6
(5.18)
204.5
(8.05)
153.7
(6.05)
Frame E
432.3 (17.02)
305.3 (12.02)
178.3 (7.02)
38.6 (1.52)
88.9/101.6 (3.50/4.00)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
50.8 (2.0)
12.7 (0.50) Conduit Knockout - 6 Plcs.
311.2
(12.25)
260.4
(10.25)
209.6
(8.25)
Frame G
660.4 (26.00)
431.8
(17.00)
Conduit Access Area
(Top)
431.8
(17.00)
50.8 (2.00)
Conduit
Access Area
547.6
(21.56)
254.0
(10.00)
298.5
(11.75)
42.9
(1.69)
381.0
(15.00)
15.9 (0.63) Dia. - 2 Mtg. Holes
(Bottom)
30
29.0 (1.14)
Pre-Installation
Mounting Requirements
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
101.6 mm
(4.0 in.)
ESC
ESC
SEL
SEL
JOG
JOG
UP
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
NOTE: F Frame drives require 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) on the sides and/or back for proper air flow.
Input Power Conditioning
In general, the 1336 PLUS II is suitable for direct connection to a correct voltage AC line that has a minimum impedance of 1% (3% for
0.37-22 kW/0.5-30 HP drives) relative to the rated drive input kVA. If the line has a lower impedance, a line reactor or isolation transformer
must be added before the drive to increase line impedance. If the line impedance is too low, transient voltage spikes or interruptions
can create excessive current spikes that will cause nuisance input fuse blowing, overvoltage faults and may cause damage to the drive
power structure.
The basic rules for determining if a line reactor or isolation transformer is required are as follows:
1. If the AC input power system does not have a neutral or one phase referenced to ground (see Unbalanced Distribution Systems on
next page), an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended. If the line-to-ground
voltages on any phase can exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage, an isolation transformer with the neutral of the
secondary grounded, is highly recommended.
2. If the AC line supplying the drive has power factor correction capacitors that are switched in and out, an isolation transformer or
5% reactors are recommended between the drive and capacitors. If the capacitors are permanently connected and not switched,
the general rules for impedance mismatch (see above) apply.
3. If the AC line frequently experiences transient power interruptions or significant voltage spikes, an isolation transformer or
5% reactors are recommended.
Refer to Unbalanced Distribution Systems on next page.
31
Pre-Installation
AC Supply Source
1336 PLUS II drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 600 volts
maximum when used with the AC input line fuses specified on Page 37.
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment damage caused by improper fusing, use only the recommended
line fuses specified on Page 37.
Unbalanced Distribution Systems
This drive is designed to operate on three-phase supply systems whose line voltages are symmetrical. Surge suppression devices are
included to protect the drive from lightning induced overvoltages between line and ground. Where the potential exists for abnormally high
phase-to-ground voltages (in excess of 125% of nominal), or where the supply ground is tied to another system or equipment that could
cause the ground potential to vary with operation, suitable isolation is required for the drive. Where this potential exists, an isolation
transformer is strongly recommended.
Ungrounded Distribution Systems
All 1336 PLUS II drives are equipped with an MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) that provides voltage surge protection and phase-to-phase plus
phase-to-ground protection which is designed to meet IEEE 587. The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression only (transient line
protection), not continuous operation.
With ungrounded distribution systems, the phase-to-ground MOV connection could become a continuous current path to ground. Energy
ratings are listed below. Exceeding published line-to-line and line-to-ground energy ratings may cause physical damage to the MOV.
Three-Phase
AC Input
Ground
R
S
T
Joules (J)
Joules (J)
Line-to-Ground MOV Rating
Includes Line-Line & Line-Ground MOVs
Joules (J)
1
2
3
4
A
Frame Reference
32
Line-to-Line MOV Rating
Includes 2 Line-Line MOVs
Joules (J)
B-C
D-G
Device Rating (V AC)
240
480/600
240/480 600
240/480 600
Line-Line Total
Line-Ground Total
160J
220J
320J
380J
280J
360J
280J
360J
320J
410J
300J
370J
Pre-Installation
Input Fuses and Circuit Breakers
1336 PLUS II can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker. Local/national electrical codes may determine additional
requirements for these installations.
Installations Per U.S. NEC/UL/CSA
Fuses
In general, the specified fuses are sutiable for branch short circuit protection and provide excellent short circuit protection for the drive. The
fuses offer a high interrupting capacity and are fast acting. Refer to the North American selections in the table on page 37.
Circuit Breakers
The Westinghouse HMCP breakers specified in the table on pages 34-35 also provide branch short circuit protection. Because circuit
breakers are typically slower than fuses and those listed are magnetic trip only, they may not be as effective in offering short circuit
protection to the drive in the event of an internal drive short circuit. They may not be as effective in limiting damage to the drive.
IEC Installations
Fuses
For those installations that are not required to meet the U.S. NEC/UL/CSA, the specified fuses are sutiable for branch short circuit
protection and provide excellent short circuit protection for the drive. The fuses offer a high interrupting capacity and are fast acting.
Refer to the European selections in the table on page 37.
Circuit Breakers
For those installations that are not required to meet the U.S. NEC/UL/CSA requirements, additional devices are available as input
circuit breakers. The Bulletin 140 and KTA3 devices meet the circuit breaker requirements of IEC947-2, but do not meet UL/CSA circuit
breaker requirements. They can be used in “non-U.S.” installations where local/national codes allow, if they are installed per their
installation instructions.
ATTENTION: The 1336 PLUS II does not provide input power short circuit protection. Specifications for the recommended fuse or
circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided.
33
Pre-Installation
Frame
Recommended Protection Devices (user supplied)
A1
A2
A3
B
C
D
E
Drive
Catalog
Number
1336FF05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
F75
007
010
015
020
025
030
040
050
060
075
100
125
HP
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
Dual-Element
Input Output Time Delay
Rating Rating Fuse
Amps Amps Min.1 Max.2
2.8
2.3
4
5
3.5
3.0
4
6
5.4
4.5
6
9
7.3
6.0
8
12.5
9.7
8.0
10
15
14.3
12.0
15
20
21.3
18.0
25
30
22.6
22.0
30
45
28.0
27.0
40
45
35.0
34.0
50
60
49.0
48.0
70
90
63.0
65.0
100
110
75.0
77.0
100
150
79.0
80.0
125
175
119.0 120.0 120
225
149.0 150.0 200
250
178.0 180.0 250
300
238.0 240.0 300
400
289.0 291.0 400
500
322.0 325.0 450
700
Non-Time
Delay Fuse
Min.1 Max.2
4
6
4
9
6
12
8
15
10
20
15
25
25
45
30
60
40
60
50
80
70
110
100
125
100
200
125
225
120
300
200
350
250
450
300
500
400
700
450
800
240 Volt Input
Motor
Circuit Circuit
Breaker3 Protector4
Amps
Amps
15
3
15
7
15
7
20
15
25
15
35
15
60
30
80
50
80
50
100
50
150
70
200
100
250
100
300
150
300
150
350
250
450
250
500
250
700
400
800
600
140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range5, 6
Available Catalog Numbers7
140M-C2E-B40
140M-D8E-B40
–
140M-C2E-B40
140M-D8E-B40
–
140M-C2E-B63
140M-D8E-B63
–
140M-C2E-C10
140M-D8E-C10
140M-F8E-C10
140M-C2E-C10
140M-D8E-C10
140M-F8E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-D8E-C16
140M-F8E-C16
140M-C2E-C25
140M-D8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
140M-C2E-C25
140M-D8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
–
–
140M-F8E-C32
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140M-CMN-2500
140M-CMN-2500
140M-CMN-4000
140M-CMN-4000
140M-CMN-6300
140M-CMN-9000
140M-CMN-9000
140M-CMN-9000
–
–
–
–
–
–
480 Volt Input
Frame
CT Ratings
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C
D
E
F
GG
34
Drive
Catalog
Number
1336FF05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
015
020
025
030
X040
040
050
X060
060
075
100
125
X150
150
200
250
P250
P300
P350
P400
P450
X250
300
350
400
450
500
600
HP
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
40
40
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
250
300
350
400
450
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
Input
Amps
1.3
2.0
2.6
3.3
4.6
6.4
10.0
13.6
16.4
24.5
28.0
25.0
32.0
40.0
46.0
61.0
58.0
73.0
75.0
82.0
105.0
137.0
172.0
178.0
197.0
261.0
322.0
322.0
357.0
421.0
471.0
527.0
322.0
357.0
421.0
471.0
521.0
585.0
664.0
VT Ratings
Ouput
Amps
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
13.3
16.1
24.0
27.0
24.2
31.0
39.0
45.0
59.0
60.0
75.0
77.0
85.0
106.0
138.0
173.0
180.0
199.0
263.0
325.0
325.0
360.0
425.0
475.0
532.0
325.0
360.0
425.0
475.0
525.0
590.0
670.0
HP
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
10
15
20
20
20
25
30
30
40
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
250
300
350
400
450
Input
Amps
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.5
4.8
7.2
10.7
15.7
22.4
24.5
28.0
28.0
35.0
43.0
49.0
61.0
63.0
75.0
75.0
93.0
119.0
149.0
178.0
178.0
238.0
290.0
322.0
357.0
421.0
471.0
527.0
Ouput
Amps
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
15.4
22.0
24.0
27.0
27.0
34.0
42.0
48.0
59.0
65.0
77.0
77.0
96.0
120.0
150.0
180.0
180.0
240.0
292.0
325.0
360.0
425.0
475.0
532.0
300
350
400
450
500
600
600
357.0
421.0
471.0
521.0
585.0
664.0
664.0
360.0
425.0
475.0
525.0
590.0
670.0
670.0
Dual Element
Time Delay
Fuse
Min.1 Max.2
3
2.5
3
3
3
4.5
4
6
5
6
8
10
12
15
20
30
30
40
35
60
35
60
35
60
45
70
60
90
70
90
80
110
80
125
100
150
100
150
125
200
150
250
200
350
250
400
250
400
300
500
400
600
450
600
450
–
500
–
600
–
600
–
700
–
450
–
450
–
500
–
600/630 800
–
800
–
900
–
Non-Time
Delay Fuse
Min.1 Max.2
3
3
3
6
3
8
4
12
5
12
8
15
12
30
20
50
30
80
35
100
35
100
35
100
45
125
60
150
70
150
80
200
80
250
100
300
100
300
125
350
150
450
200
600
250
600
250
600
300
700
400
800
450
800
Circuit
Breaker
3
Amps
15
15
15
15
15
25
35
50
80
100
100
100
125
150
150
200
250
300
300
350
350
450
500
500
700
800
800
Circuit
Protector
4
Amps
3
3
3
7
7
7
15
30
30
50
50
50
50
70
70
70
100
100
100
150
250
250
250
250
400
400
400
140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current
Range5, 6
Available Catalog Numbers - 140 . . .7
M-C2E-B16
–
–
M-C2E-B25
–
–
M-C2E-B40
M-D8E-B40
–
M-C2E-B40
M-D8E-B40
–
M-C2E-C63
M-D8E-C63
–
M-C2E-C10
M-D8E-C10
M-F8E-C10
M-C2E-C16
M-D8E-C16
M-F8E-C16
M-C2E-C16
M-D8E-C16
M-F8E-C16
M-C2E-C25
M-D8E-C25
M-F8E-C25
M-C2E-C25
M-D8E-C25
M-F8E-C25
–
–
M-F8E-C32
–
–
M-F8E-C32
–
–
M-F8E-C45
–
–
M-F8E-C45
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
-CMN-2500
-CMN-2500
-CMN-4000
-CMN-4000
-CMN-4000
-CMN-6300
-CMN-6300
-CMN-6300
-CMN-6300
-CMN-9000
-CMN-9000
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Semiconductor fuse supplied with drive.
Refer to the 1336 Spare Parts list (publication 1336-6.5) for replacement information.
Bussmann Type FWP, SPP, or 170M Series
Ferraz Shawmut Type A-70Q, A-70QS or A070URD Series
Pre-Installation
Recommended Protection Devices (user supplied)
575 Volt Input
CT Ratings
Frame
Drive
Catalog
Number
1336FA4 F10
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
C 025
030
040
050
060
D 075
100
125
E 150
200
250
X300
F
P350
P400
G 300
350
400
450
500
600
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HP
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
300
350
400
450
500
600
Input
Amps
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10.0
12.0
19.0
25.0
31.0
36.0
44.0
55.0
60.0
84.0
108.0
137.0
167.0
251.0
282.0
295.0
347.0
397.0
297.0
347.0
397.0
446.0
496.0
595.0
Ouput
Amps
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
19.0
24.0
30.0
35.0
45.0
57.0
62.0
85.0
109.0
138.0
168.0
252.0
284.0
298.0
350.0
400.0
300.0
350.0
400.0
450.0
500.0
600.0
Dual Element
Time Delay Fuse
Min.1
Max.2
3
3
6
6
10
12
15
20
15
20
20
25
25
35
30
45
40
60
50
70
60
90
80
110
90
125
110
150
150
200
175
250
225
300
350
400
400
500
400
600
450
500
400
450
500
600/630
800
800
Non-Time
Delay Fuse
Min.1 Max.2
3
6
6
10
10
15
15
20
15
30
20
40
25
60
30
80
40
100
50
125
60
150
80
200
90
225
110 300
150 350
175 500
225 500
350 600
400 700
400 800
Circuit
Breaker
3
Amps
15
15
15
20
35
40
60
80
100
125
150
200
225
300
350
350
400
500
700
800
Circuit
Protector
4
Amps
3
7
7
15
15
15
30
30
50
50
70
70
100
100
150
250
250
250
400
400
140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range5, 6
Available Catalog Numbers7
140M-C2E-B25
–
–
–
140M-C2E-C63
140M-D8E-C63
–
–
140M-C2E-C10
140M-D8E-C10
140M-F8E-C10
–
140M-C2E-C10
140M-D8E-C10
140M-F8E-C10
–
140M-C2E-C10
140M-D8E-C10
140M-F8E-C10
–
140M-C2E-C16
140M-D8E-C16
140M-F8E-C16
–
140M-C2E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C20
140-CMN-2500
140M-C2E-C25
140M-D8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
140-CMN-2500
–
–
140M-F8E-C32
140-CMN-4000
–
–
140M-F8E-C45
140-CMN-4000
–
–
140M-F8E-C45
140-CMN-6300
–
–
–
140M-CMN-6300
–
–
–
140M-CMN-6300
–
–
–
140M-CMN-9000
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Semiconductor fuse supplied with drive.
Refer to the 1336 Spare Parts list (publication 1336-6.5) for replacement information.
Bussmann Type FWP, SPP, or 170M Series
Ferraz Shawmut Type A-70Q, A-70QS or A070URD Series
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.
Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection.
Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker.
Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker.
Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip.
Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347.
Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems.
The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001B-EN-P.
35
Pre-Installation
Power Wiring – TB1
Input and output power connections are performed through terminal block, TB1.
For maintenance and setup procedures, the drive may be operated without a motor connected.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life.
The most common causes are:
• Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals.
• Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen-Bradley.
• Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor.
Contact Allen-Bradley for assistance with application or wiring.
TB1 SIGNALS
Terminal
Description
PE
Potential Earth Ground
TE
Shield Termination - True Earth
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3)
AC Line Input Terminals
+DC, –DC
DC Bus Terminals
U (T1), V (T2), W (T3)
Motor Connection
TB1 SPECIFICATIONS – USE 75° C RATED COPPER WIRE ONLY
Terminal
Block Type
Max./Min. Wire Size 1
mm2 (AWG)
Maximum Torque
N-m (lb.-in.)
A1-A4 (Page 50)
5.3/0.8 (10/18)
1.81 (16)
B1 (Page 50)
8.4/0.8 (8/18)
1.81 (16)
B2 (Page 50)
13.3/0.5 (6/20)
1.70 (15)
C (Page 50)
26.7/0.8 (3/18)
5.65 (50)
D (Page 51) 3
127.0/2.1 (250 MCM / 14)
67.4/2.1 (00/14) 2
6.00 (52)
6.00 (52)
E (Page 51) 3
253.0/2.1 (500 MCM/14)
10.00 (87)
F (Page 52) 3
303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14)
23.00 (200)
G (Page 52) 3
303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14)
23.00 (200)
1 Wire sizes given are maximum/minimum sizes that TB1 will accept – these are not recommendations.
2 Applies to 30 kW (40 HP) 200-240V, 45 & 56 kW (60 & 75 HP) 380-480V, 56 kW (75 HP) 500-600V drives only.
3 These configurations of TB1 are stud type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors to terminate the
field installed conductors.
36
Pre-Installation
Power Wiring – TB1
Features
A1-A3 Frame
A4 Frame
380-480V, 5.5-15 kW (7.5-20 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 0.75-15 kW (1-20 HP) Terminal Designations
200-240V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations
GRD
GRD
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
DC
–
V
(T2)
GRD
W
(T3)
Dynamic Brake
Option
To Motor
Required
Input Fusing
DC
+
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
BRK 2
–
DC
–
COM
DC
+
U
(T1)
To Motor
To Motor
Branch
Circuit Disconnect
Required
Input Fusing
1
W
(T3)
1 Required
Branch
Circuit Disconnect
Dynamic Brake
AC Input Line
AC Input Line
V
(T2)
To Motor
DC Input Line
1 Required
1
GRD
Important: A brake malfunction
will occur if the Dynamic Brake
is connected to "DC – COM"
B1 Frame
B2 Frame
200-240V, 7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 15 kW (20 HP) Terminal Designations
200-240V, 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480/500-600V, 5.5-11 kW (7.5-15 HP) Terminal Designations
PE
R
DC
DC
(L1)
–
+
Dynamic Brake
PE
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
PE
To Motor
To Motor
PE
DC
–
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
Dynamic Brake
Required 1
Input Fusing
1 Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
DC
+
To Motor
AC Input Line
Required 1
Input Fusing
To Motor
1 Required
Branch
Circuit Disconnect
C Frame
AC Input Line
200-240V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 18.5-45 kW (25-60 HP) Terminal Designations
PE
GRD
PE
GRD
DC
+
DC
–
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
Dynamic Brake
Required 1
Input Fusing
To Motor
To Motor
1 Required
Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
1
2
User supplied.
Terminal located separately on Series A Drives.
37
Pre-Installation
Power Wiring – TB1
Features
200-240V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 45-112 kW (60-150 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 56-112 kW (75-150 HP) Terminal Designations
D Frame
DC +
Brake
DC –
Brake
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
PE
PE
TE
To Motor
R
(L1)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
To Motor
1
1 Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
Required
Input Fusing
See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions.
AC Input Line
200-240V, 56-75 kW (75-100 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 112-187 kW (150-250 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 112-224 kW (150-300 HP) Terminal Designations
E Frame
TE
+DC
–DC
PE
PE
BUS
See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions.
User supplied.
38
S-L2
INPUT
T-L3
To Motor
Required 1
Input Fusing
1
R-L1
U-M1
V-M2
W-M3
OUTPUT
To Motor
1 Required
Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
Pre-Installation
Power Wiring – TB1
Features
380-480V, 187-336 kW (250-450 HP) Terminal Designations
F Frame
R-L1
T-L3
S-L2
PE
U-M1
Input Fusing
(Supplied)
W-M3
V-M2
To Motor
1 Required
Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
DC –
Brake
G Frame
typical terminal
DC +
Brake
380-480V, 224-448 kW (300-600 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 187-448 kW (250-600 HP) Terminal Designations
DC +
Brake
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
R
(L1)
DC –
Brake
Required 1
Input Fusing
U
(M1)
1 Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
W
(M3)
V
(M2)
AC Input Line
Brake terminals are located
behind the "U" terminal.
Access terminals
from side of chassis
To Motor
R
S
T
1
User supplied.
typical terminal layout
(located at top of drive)
U
V
(located at bottom of drive)
W
39
Pre-Installation
Control and Signal Wiring
Features
General Wiring Information
General requirements for analog signal wire include: stranded copper 0.750-0.283 mm 2 (18-22 AWG), twisted-pair, 100% shield with drain
wire, 300V minimum insulation rating and a temperature rating suitable for the application (not less than 60 degrees C). The recommended
signal (analog I/O) wire is:
• Belden 8760/9460 (or equiv.) – 0.750 mm 2 (18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
• Belden 8770 (or equiv.) – 0.750 mm 2 (18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded for remote pot only.
The recommended wire for encoder inputs/outputs is:
• Lengths less than or equal to 30 meters (98 feet) Belden 9730 (or equiv.) – 0.196 mm 2 (24 AWG), individually shielded
• Lengths greater than 30 meters (98 feet) Belden 9773 (or equiv.) – 0.750 mm 2 (18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded
Signal Connections
If the drive control connections are to be linked to an electronic circuit or device, the common or 0V line should, if possible, be grounded at
the device (source) end only.
Important: Signal Common – User speed reference signals are terminated to logic common at TB2, terminal 5. This puts the negative
(or common) side of these signals at earth ground potential. Control schemes must be examined for possible conflicts with
this type of grounding scheme.
Shield Termination – TE (True Earth)
The TE terminal block (not available on 0.37-7.5 kW (0.5-10 HP) A Frame drives) provides a terminating point for signal wiring shields.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by this block is 2.1 and 0.30 mm 2 (14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque is 1.36 N-m
(12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire only and always separate control and power cabling.
Cable Routing
If unshielded cable is used, control signal circuits should not run parallel to motor cables or unfiltered supply cables with a spacing less
than 0.3 meters (1 foot). Cable tray metal dividers or separate conduit should be used.
Important: When user-installed control and signal wiring with an insulation rating of less than 600V is used, this wiring must be routed
inside the drive enclosure and separated from any other wiring and/or uninsulated live parts.
40
Pre-Installation
Terminal Block – TB2
Features
TB2 is located at the bottom of the Main Control Board. 0.37-7.5 kW (0.5-10 HP) A Frame drives have 18 positions. Remaining frame
sizes from 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) and up have 22 positions. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB2 is 2.1 and 0.30 mm2
(14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque for all terminals is 1.36 N-m (12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire only.
Terminal Block – TB3
The Control Interface Option provides a means of interfacing various signals and commands to the 1336 PLUS II by using contact closures.
Six different versions of the option are available:
• L4
Contact Closure Interface1
• L4E/L7E2
Contact Closure Interface1 with Encoder Feedback Inputs
• L5
+24V AC/DC Interface
• L5E/L8E2
+24V AC/DC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs
• L6
115V AC Interface
• L6E/L9E2
115V AC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs
The user inputs are connected to the option board through TB3 (see Figure 2.1 for location). The L4, L5 and L6 options each have nine control
inputs. The function of each input must be selected through programming as explained later in this section. The L4E/L7E, L5E/L8E and
L6E/L9E2 options are similar to L4, L5 and L6 with the addition of encoder feedback inputs. Refer to Appendix A in Pub. 1336 PLUS – 5.3 for
input impedance values.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB3 is 2.1 and 0.30mm 2 (14 and 22 AWG). Recommended torque for all terminals is
0.90-1.13 N-m (8-10 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire only.
Digital Inputs
Digital inputs are connected at TB3.
Input Mode Select
A number of combinations are available by first programming [Input Mode] to the desired control scheme (i.e. 2-wire, 3-wire or Status).
The remaining inputs can then be configured by programming [TB3 Term 22 Sel] through [TB3 term 28 Sel]. Refer to the Digital I/O
parameter group in Chapter 6 of Pub. 1336 PLUS – 5.3 for programming information.
1 Uses internal +5V DC supply.
2 The encoder loss detection feature of the 1336 PLUS II requires the use of L7E, L8E or L9E.
41
Pre-Installation
Digital I/O Default Settings – TB3
Features
1
Input Mode (Start/Stop Functions Only)
See Speed Select Table.
If this mode is selected,
the status of all inputs
can be read at the
[Input Status] parameter.
However, only “Stop/Fault
Reset” and “Enable” will
have control function.
3 These inputs must be
present before drive
will start.
4 Bit 0 of [Direction Mask]
must = 1 to allow TB3
direction change.
5 The encoder loss detection
feature of the 1336 PLUS II
requires the use of L7E, L8E
or L9E.
2
Status2
(Factory Default)
2-Wire Control
Single-Source Control
3-Wire Control
Single-Source Reversing
Input 1
19
Status
Run Forward
Start
Input 2
20
Stop/Fault Reset3
Stop/Fault Reset3
Stop/Fault Reset3
Individually Programmable Inputs
Common
21
Status Only
Common
Input 3
22
Rev/For4 (Factory Default)
(programmable)
Input 4
23
Jog (Factory Default)
(programmable)
Input 5
24
Default Mode
shown at
right is not
active when
[Input Mode]
is set to "Status"
Auxiliary3 (Factory Default)
(programmable)
Common
25
Common
Input 6
26
Speed Select 31 (Factory Default) (programmable)
Input 7
27
Speed Select 21 (Factory Default) (programmable)
Input 8
28
Speed Select 11 (Factory Default) (programmable)
Common
29
Common
Input 9
30
Enable3
Encoder B
31
Encoder NOT A
32
Encoder NOT B
33
Encoder A
34
+12V (200mA max.)
35
Encoder Common
36
(not programmable)
Included on
L4E/L7E,
L5E/L8E &
L6E/L9E5
ATTENTION: Two-wire control uses maintained Run contacts that act as both Run (closed) and Stop (open) devices. Opening the
Stop contact (terminal 20) will stop the drive. If this contact is reclosed, any fault will be reset. If a valid Start
command is still present, the drive will restart.
If a three-wire device (i.e. HIM) is also used, pressing the HIM Stop key will also stop the drive. Releasing the
Stop key will clear any faults that are present, but the drive will not restart without cycling the Start contact.
42
Pre-Installation
Digital I/O Default Settings – TB3
Features
Available Functions for Inputs 3 through 8
A variety of combinations made up of the following inputs are available.
Input
Description
1st/2nd Accel
1st/2nd Decel
Closing these inputs (1st or 2nd Accel, 1st or 2nd Decel) commands the corresponding
rate. If both inputs are open or both are closed, the current rate is maintained.
1st/2nd Accel/Decel
Allows selection of the accel or decel time used by the drive. 1=2nd, 0=1st
Auxiliary
Faults the drive via external devices (i.e. motor thermoswitch, O.L. relays, etc.). Opening this contact will fault
(F02 - Aux Fault) the drive and shut the output off, ignoring the programmed stop mode.
Clear Fault
If drive has faulted, closing this input will clear the fault.
Digital Pot (MOP)
Up/Down
These inputs increase (up) or decrease (down) the drive commanded frequency when MOP (Motor Operated
Potentiometer) is chosen as the frequency command source. The rate of increase/decrease is programmable.
Forward
Closing these inputs (Forward or Reverse) commands the corresponding direction. If both inputs are open or
both are closed, the current direction is maintained.
Forward/Reverse
Available only with three-wire control - Closing this input commands reverse direction and opening this input
commands forward direction.
Jog
Closing this input starts the drive and causes it to run at programmed jog frequency. Opening this input stops
the drive using the programmed stop mode.
Line Loss
Closing this input gives exclusive control of drive logic to the inputs at terminal blockTB3. No other devices
may issue logic commands (excluding Stop) to the drive.
Output Contactor Closed
Output contactor auxiliary contact indicates that the output contactor is closed.
Reverse
See "Forward" above.
PI Enable
Enables the output of the process PI loop.
PI Reset
Opening this input clamps the process PI integrator value at zero. Closing this input allows the integrator to
continue to operate.
Run Reverse
Available only with two-wire control - Closing this input issues both a start command and a reverse command
to the drive. Opening the input issues a stop command to the drive.
Speed Select 1, 2, 3
These inputs choose the frequency command source for the drive. See following pages for details.
Stop Type
Closing this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 2] as the method of stopping when a stop command
is issued. Opening this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 1] as the method of stopping.
Sync
Normally wired to multiple drives – When the Sync input is low, the drive operates normally. When the input
is high, the speed of the drive will be held constant and the speed command will have no effect. During this
period the speed input of the drive will normally be changed to a different source and/or value. Allows
synchronized change of frequency command to multiple drives.
Traverse
Setting this input low disables the traverse function. When the input is high, the traverse function will be
active. [Speed Control] must also be set to "P Jump" for the function to be active.
Important: If a Control Interface Option is not installed, the [Input Mode] parameter must be set to “Status” (default) and jumpers must be
installed. If the drive was shipped from the factory without the option, these jumpers will have been installed.
Important: The [Input Mode] and [TB3 Term 22-28 Sel] parameters can be changed at any time, but the change will not affect drive
operation until power to the drive has been removed and bus voltage has decayed completely. When changing either parameter,
it is important to note that the functions of the Start and Stop inputs will change when power is reapplied to the drive.
43
Pre-Installation
Digital I/O Default Settings – TB3
Features
The programming options of the Control Interface Option allow the user to select an input combination to meet the needs of a specific
installation. The firmware will verify programming, to assure an appropriate combination has been selected.
Speed Select/Frequency Reference
The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources. The source is determined by drive programming and the
condition of the Speed Select Inputs on TB3 (or reference select bits of command word if PLC controlled - Refer to Appendix A in
Publication 1336 PLUS - 5.3).
The default source for a command reference (all speed select inputs open) is the selection programmed in [Freq Select 1]. If any of the
speed select inputs are closed, the drive will use other parameters as the speed command source. Refer to the table below and the
examples that follow.
Speed Select Input State vs. Frequency Source
Speed Select 3 Speed Select 2 Speed Select 1
Open
Open
Open
Open
Accessed through [Freq Select 2] parameter
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Frequency Source
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
[Freq Select 1]
[Freq Select 2]
[Preset Freq 1]
[Preset Freq 2]
[Preset Freq 3]
[Preset Freq 4]
[Preset Freq 5]
[Preset Freq 6]
[Preset Freq 7]
Important: The final speed command may be affected by the type of modulation selected with [Speed Control], parameter 77.
Example
Application is to follow a local HIM unless a preset speed is selected. The drive is programmed as follows:
• [Freq Select 1] = Adapter 1
1
26
Local 2
• [Freq Select 2] = Preset Freq 1
3
Speed Select 2
27
• [Preset Freq 1] = 10 Hz.
See Table 28
• [Preset Freq 2] = 20 Hz.
Speed Select 1
• [Preset Freq 3] = 30 Hz.
Contact operation for the speed select switch is described in the table below. If the user does not select an input as Speed Select 3,
[Preset Freq 4-7] would not be available.
Switch
Position
Local
1
2
3
44
Speed Select Input
1 (#28)
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
2 (#27)
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Parameter Used for
Speed Ref.
[Freq Select 1]
[Freq Select 2]
[Preset Freq 2]
[Preset Freq 3]
Programmed
Setting
Adapter 1
Preset Freq 1
20 Hz.
30 Hz.
Pre-Installation
Encoder Inputs
Features
Encoders must be line driver type, quadrature or pulse, 5V DC or 8-15V DC output, single-ended or differential and capable of supplying a
minimum of 10mA per channel. Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz.
Encoder inputs are available at TB3. The interface board is jumper selectable to accept a 5V TTL or 12V DC square-wave with a minimum
high state voltage of 3.0V DC (TTL) or 7.0V DC (12 volt encoder). Maximum low state voltage is 0.4V DC.
Encoder Signal Wiring
Single-Ended, Dual-Channel 1
31
32
33
34
35
Differential
36
31
32
33
34
35
36
A
B NOT
A NOT
to
Power Supply Common
(Terminal 36 or External)
TB3
B
A
B NOT
B
A NOT
TB3
to TE
to TE
Single-Ended
Encoder Output
Connections
1
Differential
Encoder Output
Connections
For Single-Ended, Single-Channel (pulse) applications, eliminate the B and B (NOT) connections.
Some encoders may label the "A" connection as "Signal."
Important: Correct direction of motor rotation as determined during start-up may require that the A or B channel wiring be reversed.
Encoder Power Wiring
Internal
31
32
33
34
External
35
36
31
32
33
34
35
36
TB3
+
Common
+12V DC
(200 mA)
TB3
Common
to TE
Encoder Power
Connections
using 12V DC Internal
(Drive) Power Source
Minimum On Volts = 7V DC
Minimum Current = 10mA
External
Power
Supply
to TE
Encoder Power
Connections using
External DC
Power Source
Minimum On Volts = 3V DC
Minimum Current = 10mA
Important: Control Interface Board jumpers JP3 & JP4 must be set for the voltage level of the encoder output.
45
Pre-Installation
Pulse Input/Output Option
Features
Pulse Input
The pulse input signal must be an externally powered square-wave pulse at a 5V TTL logic level. As measured at the terminal block, circuits
in the high state must generate a voltage between 3.6 and 5.5V DC at 8 mA. Circuits in the low state must generate a voltage between 0.0
and 0.8V DC. Maximum input frequency is 250kHz. Scale factor [Pulse/Enc Scale] must be set.
ATTENTION: If input voltages are maintained at levels above ±12V DC, signals may be degraded and component
damage may result.
Pulse Output
Provides a TTL pulse train suitable for driving up to three 1336 PLUS II pulse inputs or a separate 125-ohm load at TTL levels
(4V at 32 mA source, 0.8V at 3.2 mA sink).
The digital outputs are at terminals 10 through 18 of TB2.
Digital Outputs – TB2
CR1
CR3
CR2
CR3
CR4
CR4
Only Present
on B Frame
& Up Drives
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A1
A2
Contacts Shown in Unpowered State
(or Powered State with Fault/Alarm Present)
Terminal
Signal
TE
True Earth - Shield Termination
10, 11
CR1 Programmable Contact
11, 12
CR2 Programmable Contact
13, 14
14, 15
16, 17
17, 18
Resistive Rating = 115V AC/30V DC, 5.0A
CR3 Programmable Contact Inductive Rating = 115V AC/30V DC, 2.0A
A1, A2
Reserved for Future Use
46
CR4 Programmable Contact
Reserved for
Future Use
Pre-Installation
Analog Inputs/Outputs
Features
The 1336 PLUS II analog I/O configuration provides a standard set of inputs and outputs with the capability to install up to 2 option boards,
thus replacing the standard I/O with a variety of options. All connections are performed at TB2. Installing an option board in the slot A or B
location will change the function of those terminals on TB2 from standard. Only one option board can be installed in each slot. The standard
and optional I/O configurations are shown below.
Analog I/O – TB2
Only Present
on B Frame
& Up Drives
TE
TE
Signal
Common
1
2
3
Single-Ended
Input 1
Pot., 10V or 20mA
4
Std.
Pot.
Reference
+5V 1
Single-Ended
Input 0
Pot., 10V or 20mA
LA2
Isolated
Input 0 (+)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Input 0 (±)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Input 1 (+)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Input 1 (±)
10V or 20mA
LA6
Isolated
Input 0 (+)
±10V, ±20mA
Isolated
Input 0 (±)
±10V, ±20mA
Thermistor
Isolated
Input (+)
Thermistor
Isolated
Input (±)
LA7
Isolated
Input 0 (+)
±10V, ±20mA
Isolated
Input 0 (±)
±10V, ±20mA
Isolated
Input 1 (+)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Input 1 (±)
10V or 20mA
5
Signal
Common
6
7
8
Std.
Single-Ended
Input 2
Pot., 10V or 20mA
Single Ended
Output 0
0-10V Only
LA1
Single-Ended
Input 2 2
Pot., 10V or 20mA
Single-Ended
Output 0
10V or 20mA
Single-Ended
Output 1
20mA Only
0-20mA
Output
Return
LA3
Isolated
Output 0 (+)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Output 0 (±)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Output 1 (+)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Output 1 (±)
10V or 20mA
LA4
Isolated
Input 2 (+)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Input 2 (±)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Output 1 (+)
10V or 20mA
Isolated
Output 1 (±)
10V or 20mA
LA5
Single-Ended
Output 0
10V or 20mA
Non-Isolated
250 kHz
Pulse Output
Isolated
250 kHz
Pulse In (+)
Isolated
250 kHz
Pulse In (±)
or (select 1)
Single Ended
Output 1
0-10V Only
Signal
Common
or (select 1)
S
I
G
N
A
L
C
O
M
M
O
N
1 If an Option Board is installed in Slot A, the +5V pot. reference will not be
available. If a 5V source is required, it must be user supplied.
2 Standard Analog Input 2 is maintained at this terminal ± configure with J11.
Analog I/O Option Slot A
9
Analog I/O Option Slot B
47
Pre-Installation
Analog Inputs/Outputs
Features
All isolated I/O is designed with full galvanic (greater than 10 meg ohms, less than 50 pf) isolation. This results in an insulation withstand capability of
200V AC from each channel to True Earth (TE) ground and between channels. The Analog I/O Option Boards are summarized below.
Option
LA1
(LA1C) 2
Board Type
Dual Analog Output
Slot
B
LA2
(LA2C) 2
LA3
(LA3C) 2
Dual Isolated Input
A
Dual Isolated Output
B
LA4
(LA4C) 2
Isolated Input/
Isolated Output
B
LA5
(LA5C) 2
Analog Output/Pulse
Output/Pulse Input
B
LA6 1
(LA6C) 2
Isolated Bipolar/
Isolated Thermistor
Input
A
LA7 1
(LA7C) 2
Isolated Bipolar
Input/Isolated Input
A
Description
This option replaces both standard analog outputs with two single-ended high resolution
analog outputs. Analog Output 0 is configurable to 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation while
Analog Output 1 is for 0-20 mA operation only. This option maintains access to the standard
(non-isolated) Analog Input 2 through TB2-6 – Configuration remains with jumper J11.
This option replaces the two standard analog inputs with two galvanically isolated analog
inputs. Both analog input channels are configurable for 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation.
Replaces Analog Input 2 and both standard analog outputs with two galvanically isolated
high resolution analog outputs. Both analog output channels are configurable for 0-10V
or 0-20 mA operation.
This option replaces Analog Input 2 and both standard analog outputs with a galvanically
isolated analog input and a galvanically isolated high resolution analog output. Both analog
channels are configurable for 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation.
This option replaces Analog Input 2 and both standard analog outputs with a single-ended
high resolution analog output, a single-ended 5V pulse output, and galvanically isolated
5V pulse input. The analog output channel is configurable for
0-10V or 0-20 mA operation.
This option replaces the two standard analog inputs with agalvanically isolated analog
input and a galvanically isolated thermistor input. Analog Input 0 is configurable
for ±10V or ±20 mA operation, with polarity determining forward or reverse operation.
Analog Input 0 is suitable for use with PTC sensor chains with a maximum total resistance
at normal operating temperature of 1.8k ohms. An indication occurs in short circuit or overtemperature conditions. A short circuit condition is when the total resistance of the sensor
chain is less than 60 ohms with reset from the short circuit condition occurring when the
resistance exceeds 70 ohms. An over-temperature condition is when the total resistance
of the sensor chain exceeds 3.3k ohms with reset from the over-temperature condition
occurring when the resistance is less than 2.2k ohms.
This option replaces the two standard analog inputs with two galvanically isolated analog
inputs. Analog Input 0 is configurable for ±10V or ±20 mA operation, with polarity
determining forward or reverse operation, while Analog Input 1 is configurable for
0-10V or 0-20 mA operation.
1 If a bi-polar input option (LA6 or LA7) is installed, the signal is designated “Analog Input 0.” Note the following:
3-Wire Control – If [Input Mode] is set to “3 Wire” and the bi-polar input is selected as the active frequency reference [Freq Select 1 or 2],
it is assumed that direction control is desired via analog polarity. If another source has control of direction, a “Bipolar Direction” fault (F16) will occur. If direction
control via polarity is not required, bit 7 of [Direction Mask] should be set to “0”. This causes the input to be treated as a 0-10V frequency reference only.
Negative analog signals are treated as zero and direction control must come from another source.
2-Wire Control – If [Input Mode] is set to “2 Wire,” it is assumed that direction control is provided via the 2 wire inputs (Run Forward
and Run Reverse). Bit 7 of [Direction Mask] must be set to “0”. This causes the input to be treated as a 0-10V frequency reference only. Negative analog signals
are treated as zero. Failure to set the Mask will generate a “Bipolar Direction” (F16) fault.
2 Configured Drives Program options which are typical of North America. Other locations should contact their local Rockwell Automation office for availability of
similar poroduct.
48
Pre-Installation
Standard Analog I/O Setup
Features
The 1336 PLUS II has a series of jumpers to connect the standard I/O to TB2 when no analog options (LA1, LA2, etc.) are present. Connectors J9 and J10
(see below) each have four jumpers connecting pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and 7-8. These jumpers must be in place for the inputs and outputs to be active at TB2.
Connector J9
Input Configuration (J8, J11, J13)
0-10V
Input 1
TB2-2 4
3
Input 0
TB2-1 2
1
Pot Ref. (5V)
TB2-5
J8 (TB2-2, Input 0)
(0-10V Configuration Shown)
Pot
Common
5
Pot
7
Pot
TB2-4 8
TB2-3 6
J13 (TB2-3, Input 1)
(Pot Configuration Shown)
J11 (TB2-6, Input 2)
(0-20 mA Configuration Shown)
0-20 mA
0-10V
Common
0-20 mA
0-10V
TB2-9 8
7
Common
TB2-8 6
5
Output 1
TB2-7 4
3
Output 0
TB2-6 2
1
Input 2
0-20 mA
Connector J10
In addition, each input can be configured (see figure above) for 0-10V, 0-20 mA or potentiometer. Placing a jumper across the top of the
connector configures that input for 0-10V operation. The bottom provides 0-20 mA and the right-side provides potentiometer operation.
Analog Option Board Installation and Removal
If the drive is not factory configured with Analog Options (LA1, LA2, etc.), the desired option boards can be user installed. Prior to
installation, the jumpers at J9 and/or J10 must be removed. If a board is removed at a later time, the jumpers must be reinstalled.
Refer to the detailed instructions supplied with the option boards.
49
Pre-Installation
Motor Cables
Features
A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be
separated from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 meters (1 foot) for every 10 meters (32.8 feet) of length.
In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils (0.4mm/0.015 in.).
The cable should be 4-conductor with the ground lead being connected directly to the drive ground terminal (PE) and the motor frame
ground terminal.
Shielded Cable
Shielded cable is recommended if sensitive circuits or devices are connected or mounted to the machinery driven by the motor. The shield
must be connected to both the drive ground (drive end) and motor frame ground (motor end). The connection must be made at both ends to
minimize interference.
If cable trays or large conduits are to be used to distribute the motor leads for multiple drives, shielded cable is recommended to reduce or
capture the noise from the motor leads and minimize “cross coupling” of noise between the leads of different drives. The shield should be
connected to the ground connections at both the motor and drive end.
Armored cable also provides effective shielding. Ideally it should be grounded only at the drive (PE) and motor frame. Some armored cable
has a PVC coating over the armor to prevent incidental contact with grounded structure. If, due to the type of connector, the armor is
grounded at the cabinet entrance, shielded cable should be used within the cabinet if power leads will be run close to control signals.
In some hazardous environments it is not permissible to ground both ends of the cable armor because of the possibility of high current
circulating at the input frequency if the ground loop is cut by a strong magnetic field. This only applies in the proximity of powerful
electrical machines. In such cases, consult factory for specific guidelines.
Conduit
If metal conduit is preferred for cable distribution, the following guidelines must be followed.
• Drives are normally mounted in cabinets and ground connections are made at a common ground point in the cabinet. Normal installation
of conduit provides grounded connections to both the motor frame ground (junction box) and drive cabinet ground. These ground
connections help minimize interference. This is a noise reduction recommendation only, and does not affect the requirements for safety
grounding.
• No more than three sets of motor leads can be routed through a single conduit. This will minimize “cross talk” that could reduce the
effectiveness of the noise reduction methods described. If more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required, shielded
cable as previously described must be used. If practical, each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads.
ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both
ends. For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit
should be disabled. This will eliminate the possible shock hazard from “cross coupled” drive motor leads.
50
Pre-Installation
Motor Cables
Features
Motor Lead Lengths
Installations with long cables to the motor may require the addition of output reactors or cable terminators to limit voltage reflections at the
motor. Refer to the following tables for the maximum length cable allowed for various installation techniques. For installations that exceed
the recommended maximum lengths listed, contact the factory.
MAXIMUM MOTOR CABLE LENGTH RESTRICTIONS IN METERS (FEET) - 380V-480V DRIVES 1
No External Devices
Motor
A
Drive Drive kW Motor kW Any
Frame (HP)
(HP)
Cable
A1
0.37
0.37
12.2
(0.5)
(0.5)
(40)
0.75
0.75
12.2
(1)
(1)
(40)
0.37
12.2
(0.5)
(40)
1.2
1.2
12.2
(1.5)
(1.5)
(40)
0.75
12.2
(1)
(40)
0.37
12.2
(0.5)
(40)
A2
1.5
1.5
7.6
(2)
(2)
(25)
1.2
7.6
(1.5)
(25)
0.75
7.6
(1)
(25)
0.37
7.6
(0.5)
(25)
2.2
2.2
7.6
(3)
(3)
(25)
1.5
7.6
(2)
(25)
0.75
7.6
(1)
(25)
0.37
7.6
(0.5)
(25)
A3
3.7
3.7
7.6
(5)
(5)
(25)
2.2
7.6
(3)
(25)
1.5
7.6
(2)
(25)
0.75
7.6
(1)
(25)
0.37
7.6
(0.5)
(25)
A4
5.5-15
5.5-15
7.6
(7.5-20)
(7.5-20)
(25)
B
11-22
11-22
7.6
(15-30)
(15-30)
(25)
C
30-45
30-45
7.6
(X40-X60) (40-60)
(25)
D
45-112
45-112
12.2
(60-X150) (60-150)
(40)
E
112-187
112-224
12.2
(150-250) (150-300) (40)
F
187-336
187-336
18.3
(250-450) (250-450) (60)
G
187-448
187-448
18.3
(X250-600) (250-600) (60)
B
Any
Cable
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
30.5
(100)
53.3
(175)
53.3
(175)
53.3
(175)
1329
Any
Cable
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
w/1204-TFB2 Term.
Motor
1600V or
1329R/L (1850V)
Any
Cable 6
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
121.9
(400)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Note
For applications/
installations using
new motors, no
restrictions in lead
length due to
voltage reflection
are necessary. You
should observe
standard practices
for voltage drop,
cable capacitance,
and other issues.
For retrofit
situations, check
with the motor
manufacturer for
insulation rating.
A or B
Cable Type
Shld. 3 Unshld.
1329
Any
Cable
Use 1204-TFA1
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Reactor at Drive 2
Motor
w/1204-TFA1 Terminator
Motor
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
A
Cable Type
Shld. 3 Unshld.
30.5
61.0
(100)
(200)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
61.0
(100)
(200)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
B
Cable Type
Shld. 3 Unshld.
30.5
61.0
(100)
(200)
30.5
30.5
(100)
(100)
30.5
61.0
(100)
(200)
61.0
61.0
(200)
(200)
61.0
61.0
(200)
(200)
61.0
61.0
(200)
(200)
91.4
61.0
(300)
(200)
91.4
61.0
(300)
(200)
91.4
61.0
(300)
(200)
91.4
61.0
(300)
(200)
Use 1204-TFB2
1329
Any
Cable
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
121.9
(400)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
A
Any
Cable
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
24.4
(80)
24.4
(80)
76.2
(250)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
B or 1329
Any
Cable
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Type A Motor Characteristics:
No phase paper or misplaced phase paper, lower quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 850 and 1000 volts.
Type B Motor Characteristics:
Properly placed phase paper, medium quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 1000 and 1200 volts.
1329R/L Motors:
These AC Variable Speed motors are “Control-Matched” for use with Allen-Bradley Drives. Each motor is designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Federal Energy Act
of 1992. All 1329R/L motors are optimized for variable speed operation and include premium inverter grade insulation systems which meet or exceed NEMA MG1, Part 31.40.4.2.
51
Pre-Installation
Motor Cables
Features
MAXIMUM MOTOR CABLE LENGTH RESTRICTIONS IN METERS (FEET) - 500V-600V DRIVES 4
No External Devices
Motor
Drive Drive kW
Frame (HP)
A4
0.75
(1)
1.5
(2)
2.2
(3)
3.7
(5)
C
D
E
F
G
5.5-15
(7.5-20)
18.5-45
(25-60)
56-93
(75-125)
112-224
(150-X300)
261-298
(350-400)
224-448
(300-600)
Motor kW
(HP)
0.75
(1)
0.37
(0.5)
1.5
(2)
1.2
(1.5)
0.75
(1)
0.37
(0.5)
2.2
(3)
1.5
(2)
0.75
(1)
0.37
(0.5)
3.7
(5)
2.2
(3)
1.5
(2)
0.75
(1)
0.37
(0.5)
5.5-15
(7.5-20)
18.5-45
(25-60)
56-93
(75-125)
112-224
(150-X300)
261-298
(350-400)
224-448
(300-600)
A
Any
Cable
NR
B
Any
Cable
NR
1329R/L5
Any
Cable
NA
NR
NR
NA
NR
NR
NA
NR
NR
NA
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NA
NR
NR
NA
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NA
NR
NR
NA
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
w/1204-TFB2 Terminator
Motor
1600V or
1329R/L5
A
B
(1850V)
Any
Any
Any
Cable
Cable
Cable
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
NA
335.3
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
NA
(600)
NR
182.9
NA
(600)
NR
182.9
NA
(600)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
NR
182.9
335.3
(600)
(1100)
91.4
182.9
182.9
(300)
(600)
(600)
91.4
182.9
182.9
(300)
(600)
(600)
91.4
182.9
182.9
(300)
(600)
(600)
91.4
182.9
182.9
(300)
(600)
(600)
91.4
182.9
182.9
(300)
(600)
(600)
91.4
182.9
182.9
(300)
(600)
(600)
w/1204-TFA1 Terminator
Motor
1600V or
1329R/L5
A
B
(1850V)
Any
Any
Any
Cable
Cable
Cable
NR
61.0
NA
(200)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
NA
(200)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
NA
(200)
NR
61.0
NA
(200)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
NA
(200)
NR
61.0
NA
(200)
NR
61.0
NA
(200)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
NR
61.0
182.9
(200)
(600)
Reactor at Drive 2
Motor
1600V or
1329R/L5
A
B
(1850V)
Any
Any
Any
Cable
Cable
Cable
Not Recommended
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR = Not Recommended
NA = Not Available at time of printing
1
Values shown are for 480V nominal input voltage, drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz and ambient temperature at the motor of 40°C. Consult factory regarding
operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz. Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions. For input voltages of 380, 400 or 415V AC, multiply the table values
by 1.25, 1.20 or 1.15, respectively.
2 A 3% reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality. Reactors must have a turn-turn insulation rating of
2100 volts or higher.
3 Includes wire in conduit.
4 Values shown are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz.
Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions.
5 When used on 600V systems, 1329R or 1329L motors have a corona inception voltage rating of approximately 1850V.
6 These distance restrictions are due to charging of cable capacitance and may vary from application to application.
52
Pre-Installation
Output Devices
Features
Drive Output Disconnection
ATTENTION: The hazard for injury or death from electric shock may exist if a disconnecting means is wired to drive output
terminals and is opened during drive operation. Any disconnecting means wired to drive output terminals U, V,
and W must be capable of disabling the drive if opened during drive operation. An auxiliary contact must be
used to simultaneously disable the drive.
Common Mode Cores
Common Mode Cores will help reduce the common mode noise at the drive output and guard against interference with other electrical
equipment (programmable controllers, sensors, analog circuits, etc.). In addition, reducing the PWM carrier frequency will reduce the
effects and lower the risk of common mode noise interference. Refer to the table below.
1336 PLUS Common Mode Chokes
Catalog Number
Used with . . .
Description
1321-M001
Communications Cables, Analog Signal Cables, etc.
Open Style - Signal Level
1321-M009
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP)
Open Style with Terminal Block, 9A
1321-M048
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 5.5-22 kW (7.5-30 HP)
600V, 5.5-30 kW (7.5-40 HP)
Open Style, 48A
1321-M180
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 30-112 kW (40-X150 HP)
600V, 37-93 kW (50-125 HP)
Open Style, 180A
1321-M670
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 112-448 kW (150-600 HP)
600V, 149-448 kW (200-600 HP)
Open Style, 670A
53
Pre-Installation
Cable Termination
Features
Optional Cable Terminator
Voltage doubling at motor terminals, known as reflected wave phenomenon, standing wave or transmission line effect, can occur when
using drives with long motor cables.
Inverter duty motors with phase-to-phase insulation ratings of 1200 volts or higher should be used to minimize effects of reflected wave
on motor insulation life.
Applications with non-inverter duty motors or any motor with exceptionally long leads may require an output filter or cable terminator.
A filter or terminator will help limit reflection to the motor, to levels which are less than the motor insulation rating.
The tables on pages 52 and 53 list the maximum recommended cable length for unterminated cables, since the voltage doubling
phenomenon occurs at different lengths for different drive ratings. If your installation requires longer motor cable lengths, a reactor
or cable terminator is recommended. Also, refer to these tables for frequency, cable length and voltage restrictions of 1204-TFA1 or
1204-TFB2 terminators.
Optional Output Reactor
Bulletin 1321 Reactors listed in the 1336 PLUS-3.0 Price Sheet can be used for drive input and output. These reactors are specifically
constructed to accommodate IGBT inverter applications with switching frequencies up to 20 kHz. They have a UL approved dielectric
strength of 4000 volts, opposed to a normal rating of 2500 volts. The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated to guard
against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv/dt. When using motor line reactors, it is recommended that the drive PWM frequency
be set to its lowest value to minimize losses in the reactors.
Important: By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage will be lower because of the voltage drop across the reactor - this may
also mean a reduction of motor torque.
User Supplied Enclosures
1336 PLUS II drives installed in user supplied enclosures may be mounted within an enclosure or may be mounted to allow the heatsink to
extend outside the enclosure. Use the following information in combination with the enclosure manufacturer’s guidelines for sizing.
54
Pre-Installation
User Supplied Enclosures
Features
Cat No.
200-240V DRIVES
AQF05
AQF07
AQF10
AQF15
AQF20
AQF30
AQF50
AQF75
A007
A010
A015
A020
A025
A030
A040
A050
A060
A075
A100
A125
Base Derate
Amps 1
Derate
Curve 2, 3
Heat Dissipation
Drive Watts 2, 3, 4
Heatsink Watts 2
Total Watts 2
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
22
27
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
No Derate
Figure B
Figure D
No Derate
No Derate
No Derate
Figure G
Figure H
Figure J
Figure L
Figure M
Figure N
13
15
17
21
25
33
42
58
156
200
205
210
215
220
361
426
522
606
755
902
15
21
32
42
56
72
116
186
486
721
819
933
1110
1110
1708
1944
2664
2769
3700
4100
28
36
49
63
81
105
158
244
642
921
1024
1143
1325
1330
2069
2370
3186
3375
4455
5002
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
15.4
22.0
24.0
27.0
27
34
42
48
59
65
77
77
96
120
150
180
180
240
292
325
322
360
425
357
475
421
525
471
590
527
670
670
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
No Derate
Figure B
Figure C
Figure D
Figure E
Figure E
Figure F
Figure F
No Derate
Figure G
Figure H
Figure J
Figure J
Figure L
Figure M
Figure N
Figure O
No Derate
No Derate
Figure P
No Derate
Figure Q
No Derate
Figure R
No Derate
Figure S
Figure T
Figure T
12
13
15
16
19
23
29
58
68
88
96
117
140
141
141
175
175
193
193
361
361
426
522
606
606
755
902
491
902
1005
619
1055
733
1295
793
1335
931
1395
1485
9
15
20
27
36
54
84
186
232
332
356
486
628
720
820
933
933
1110
1110
1708
1708
1944
2664
2769
2769
3700
4100
4658
4100
4805
5342
5455
6039
6175
6329
6875
7000
7525
8767
21
28
35
43
55
77
113
244
300
420
452
603
768
861
961
1108
1108
1303
1303
2069
2069
2370
3186
3375
3375
4455
5002
5149
5002
5810
5961
6510
6772
7470
7122
8210
7931
8920
10252
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
168
252
284
300
300
350
350
400
400
450
500
600
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
No Derate
No Derate
No Derate
No Derate
No Derate
Figure G
Figure I
Figure K
Figure V
Figure W
Figure X
Figure Y
Figure AB & AC
Figure AB & AC
Figure Z
Figure AB & AC
Figure AA
Figure AB & AC
Figure AB & AC
Figure AB & AC
25
29
32
35
38
41
52
60
141
141
175
193
193
361
426
522
606
755
890
940
926
1000
580
1430
711
1465
1500
1610
29
57
87
117
148
177
286
358
492
526
678
899
981
1533
1978
2162
2315
3065
3625
3990
5015
5935
6125
7120
7000
8020
8925
10767
54
86
119
152
186
218
338
418
633
667
853
1092
1174
1894
2404
2683
2921
3820
4515
4930
5941
6935
6705
8550
7711
9485
10425
12377
380-480V DRIVES
BRF05
BRF07
BRF10
BRF15
BRF20
BRF30
BRF50
BRF75
BRF100
BRF150
BRF200
B015
B020
B025
B030
BX040
B040
B050
BX060
B060
B075
B100
B125
BX150
B150
B200
B250
BP/BPR250 6
BX250
B300 5
BP/BPR300 6
B350 5
BP/BPR350 6
B400 5
BP/BPR400 6
B450 5
BPBPR450 6
B500 5
B600 5
1
Base Derate Amps are
based on nominal voltage
(240, 480 or 600V). If
input voltage exceeds
Drive Rating, Drive
Output must be derated.
Refer to Figure AE.
2
Rating is at 4 kHz (2 kHz
for 224-448 kW/300-600 HP,
500-600V). If Carrier
frequencies above 4 kHz
are selected, drive rating
must be derated.
Refer to Figure A-AC.
3
Drive Ambient Temperature
Rating is 40° C. If ambient
exceeds 40° C, the drive
must be derated.
Refer to Figure A-AC.
4
Drive Rating is based on
altitudes of 1,000 m
(3,000 ft) or less. If
installed at higher altitude,
drive must be derated.
Refer to Figure AD.
5
Important: Two (2) 725 CFM
fans are required if an open
type drive is mounted in a
user supplied enclosure.
6
Important: 1336F-BPRxxx
drives require two (2) fans
capable of producing greater
than 450 CFM, if an open
type drive is mounted in a
user supplied enclosure.
500-600V DRIVES
CWF10
CWF20
CWF30
CWF50
CWF75
CWF100
CWF150
CWF200
C025
C030
C040
C050
C060
C075
C100
C125
C150
C200
C250
CX300
C300 5
C350 5
CP/CPR350
C400 5
CP/CPR400
C450 5
C500 5
C600 5
55
Pre-Installation
Derating Guidelines
Features
Drive ratings can be affected by a number of factors. If more than one factor exists, derating percentages must be multiplied. For example,
if a 14 Amp drive (B007) is installed at a 2,000 m (6,600 ft.) altitude and has a 2% high input line voltage, the actual amp rating will be:
14 X 94% Altitude Derate X 96% High Line Derate = 12.6 Amps.
Ambient Temperature/Carrier Frequency
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in 40º C Ambient & Open Drive in 50º C Ambient.
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in Ambient between 41º C & 50º C.
100%
Figure A
98%
1336F-AQF05-AQF75 and BRF05-BRF200
% of Drive
Rated Amps
96%
94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
8
10
12
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure B
98%
1336F-A010 and B020
% of Drive
Rated Amps
96%
94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
8
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure C
100%
1336F-B025
96%
% of Drive 92%
Rated Amps 88%
84%
80%
2
Figure D
1336F-A015 and B030
4
6
8
4
6
8
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure E
1336F-B040 and BX040
100%
98%
96%
% of Drive 94%
Rated Amps 92%
90%
88%
86%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
56
6
Pre-Installation
Derating Guidelines
Features
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in 40º C Ambient & Open Drive in 50º C Ambient.
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in Ambient between 41º C & 50º C.
Figure F
100%
95%
1336F-B050 and BX060
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure G
98%
1336F-A040, B075, C075
% of Drive
Rated Amps
96%
94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure H
1336F-A050, B100
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure I
98%
1336F-C100
% of Drive
Rated Amps
96%
94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure J
1336F-A060, B125, BX150
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure K
1336F-C125
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
(40%) 6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
57
Pre-Installation
Derating Guidelines
Features
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in 40º C Ambient & Open Drive in 50º C Ambient.
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in Ambient between 41º C & 50º C.
Figure L
100%
96%
1336F-A075, B150
% of Drive 92%
Rated Amps 88%
84%
80%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure M
1336F-A100, B200
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure N
1336F-A125, B250
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
(60%) 6
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure O
96%
1336F-BP250, BPR250
% of Drive
Rated Amps
92%
88%
84%
80%
2
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure P
1336F-BP300, BPR300
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure Q
1336F-BP350, BPR350
100%
90%
% of Drive 80%
Rated Amps 70%
60%
50%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
58
6
Pre-Installation
Derating Guidelines
Features
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in 40º C Ambient & Open Drive in 50º C Ambient.
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in Ambient between 41º C & 50º C.
Figure R
100%
90%
1336F-BP400, BPR400
% of Drive 80%
Rated Amps 70%
60%
50%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure S
90%
1336F-BP450, BP450
% of Drive
Rated Amps
80%
70%
60%
50%
2
6
100%
Figure T
90%
1336F-B500 and B600
Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
% of Drive 80%
Rated Amps 70%
60 Hz
60%
50 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
100%
Figure U
98%
1336F-CWF10 through CWF200
% of Drive
Rated Amps
96%
Not
Recommended
94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
8
10
12
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure V
1336F-C150
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure W
1336F-C200
100%
90%
80%
% of Drive
70%
Rated Amps
60%
50%
40%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
59
Pre-Installation
Derating Guidelines
Features
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in 40º C Ambient & Open Drive in 50º C Ambient.
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in Ambient between 41º C & 50º C.
100%
Figure X
90%
1336F-C250
80%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
70%
60%
50%
40%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure Y
90%
1336F-CX300
80%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
70%
60%
50%
40%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure Z
1336F-CP350, CPR350
Figure AA
100%
1336F-CP400, CPR450
90%
80%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
% of Drive
Rated Amps
70%
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
60%
50%
50%
2
4
6
2
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure AB
1336F-C300
through C600
Enclosed Drive
in 40˚ C Ambient
Figure AC
100%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
Assumes two (2)
725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
90%
80%
C300
70%
C350
C400
C450
C500
C600
60%
50%
40%
2
Altitude/High Input Voltage
Figure AD
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
4
6
100%
1336F-C300
% of Drive
Rated Amps
through C600
Enclosed Drive
in 41˚ - 50˚ C Ambient
Assumes two (2)
725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
6kHZ Data Not Available at Time of Printing
80%
C450
C500
70%
60%
C600
50%
40%
2
3
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
% of Drive
90%
Rated Amps
80%
0
1,000
(3,300)
2,000
(6,600)
3,000
(9,900)
4,000 m
(13,200) (ft)
Altitude
High Input Voltage
Required Only
for the following drives:
1336F-x025 – 18.5 kW (25 HP) at 8 kHz
1336F-x030 – 22 kW (30 HP) at 6 or 8 kHz
1336F-x060 – 45 kW (60 HP) at 6 kHz
60
100%
% of Drive
Rated Amps 90%
80%
240, 480 or 600V Nominal
+2%
+4%
+6%
Input Voltage
C300/
C350
C400
90%
Altitude – All Drive Ratings
Figure AE
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
+8%
+10%
4
Pre-Installation
1336 PLUS II Remote Device Distances
Features
Total cable length between each device and the drive must be 10 meters (33 feet) or less.
HIM or
Other
Remote
Device
Maximum Cable Length
in Meters = 10 – X
Length = X Meters
Total cable distance between each device &
drive must be 10 meters (33 feet) or less.
Maximum Cable Length
in Meters = 10 – X
Port Expansion Option
1203-SG2
HIM or Other Remote Device
Maximum Cable
Length = 10 Meters
61
Pre-Installation
Notes
62
1336 PLUS II Selection Guide
1336 PLUS II Selection Guide
Catalog Number Explanation
1336F
BULLETIN NO.
—
A007
VOLTAGE/RATING
AA
—
ENCLOSURE
(MUST BE SPECIFIED)
—
EN
LANGUAGE
(MUST BE SPECIFIED) 1
—
LA6
CONTROL
INTERFACE
(OPTIONAL) 2
—
HAS1
HUMAN
INTERFACE
(OPTIONAL) 2
—
GM1
COMMUNICATION
CARD
(OPTIONAL) 2
1 A Language Module must be specified with each drive.
2 At least one of either a Control Interface, Human Interface or Communication Card Option will be required to make the drive functional. The chosen option(s)
may be ordered factory installed or as add-on kits.
63
1336 PLUS II Selection Guide
Constant/Variable Torque Drives and Enclosures
Features
200-240V
Drive Rating 1
Constant Torque
Amps
kW
CT HP
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
22
22
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.2
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
56
75
93
VT HP 2
Open
IP00
No Enclosure
NEMA Type 1
IP20
General Purpose
NEMA Type 4
IP65
Resist Water, Dust
NEMA Type 12
IP54
Industrial Use
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
AQF05 – AN
AQF07 – AN
AQF10 – AN
AQF15 – AN
AQF20 – AN
AQF30 – AN
AQF50 – AN
AQF75 – AN
A007 – AN
A010 – AN
A015 – AN
A020 – AN
A025 – AN
A030 – AN
A040 – AN
A050 – AN
A060 – AN
A075 – AN
A100 – AN
A125 – AN
AQF05 – AA
AQF07 – AA
AQF10 – AA
AQF15 – AA
AQF20 – AA
AQF30 – AA
AQF50 – AA
AQF75 – AA
A007 – AA
A010 – AA
A015 – AA
A020 – AA
A025 – AA
A030 – AA
A040 – AA
A050 – AA
A060 – AA
A075 – AA9
A100 – AA9
A125 – AA9
AQF05 – AF
AQF07 – AF
AQF10 – AF
AQF15 – AF
AQF20 – AF
AQF30 – AF
AQF50 – AF
AQF75 – AF
A007 – AF
A010 – AF
A015 – AF
A020 – AF
A025 – AF
A030 – AF
AQF05 – AJ
AQF07 – AJ
AQF10 – AJ
AQF15 – AJ
AQF20 – AJ
AQF30 – AJ
AQF50 – AJ
AQF75 – AJ
A007 – AJ
A010 – AJ
A015 – AJ
A020 – AJ
A025 – AJ
A030 – AJ
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
380-480V
Drive Rating 1
Drive Rating 1
Constant Torque Variable Torque Constant Torque
Amps HP
Amps HP 2
Amps
kW
Variable Torque
Amps
kW
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
13.3
16.1
24.0
27.0
24.2
31
39
45
59
60
75
77
85
106
138
173
180
199
263
325
325
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
40
40
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
250
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
15.4
22.0
24.0
27.0
27
34
42
48
59
65
75
77
96
120
150
180
180
240
292
325
360
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
10
15
15
20
20
25
30
30
40
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
250
300
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
13.3
16.1
24.0
27.0
24.2
31
39
45
59
60
75
77
85
106
138
173
180
199
263
325
325
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.2
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
11
15
18.5
22
30
30
37
45
45
56
75
93
112
112
149
187
187
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
15.4
22.0
24.0
27.0
27
34
42
48
59
65
75
77
96
120
150
180
180
240
292
325
360
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.2
1.5
2.2
3.7
7.5
11
11
15
15
18.5
22
22
30
37
45
45
56
75
93
112
112
149
187
187
224
325
360
360
250
300
300
360
425
425
300
350
350
325
360
360
187
224
224
360
425
425
224
261
261
425
425
350
350
475
475
400
400
425
425
261
261
475
475
298
298
475
475
400
400
525
532
450
450
475
475
298
298
525
532
336
336
525
532
450
450
590
532
500
450
525
532
336
336
590
532
373
336
590
670
500
600
670
670
600
600
590
670
373
448
670
670
448
448
64
Open
IP00
No Enclosure
NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 4
NEMA Type 12
IP20
IP20
IIP65
IP54
General Purpose CE/C-tick Conformance Resist Water, Dust Industrial Use
BRF05 – AN
BRF07 – AN
BRF10 – AN
BRF15 – AN
BRF20 – AN
BRF30 – AN
BRF50 – AN
BRF75 – AN
BRF100 – AN
BRF150 – AN
BRF200 – AN
B015 – AN
B020 – AN
B025 – AN
B030 – AN
BX040 – AN
B040 – AN
B050 – AN
BX060 – AN 4
B060 – AN
B075 – AN
B100 – AN
B125 – AN
BX150 – AN
B150 – AN
B200 – AN
B250 – AN
BP250 – AN 7
BPR250 – AN 7
BX250 – AN
B300 – AN
BP300 – AN 7
BPR300 – AN 7
B350 – AN
BP350 – AN 7
BPR350 – AN 7
B400 – AN
BP400 – AN 7
BPR400 – AN 7
B450 – AN
BP450 – AN 7
BPR450 – AN 7
B500 – AN
B600 – AN
BRF05 – AA
BRF07 – AA
BRF10 – AA
BRF15 – AA
BRF20 – AA
BRF30 – AA
BRF50 – AA
BRF75 – AA
BRF100 – AA
BRF150 – AA
BRF200 – AA
B015 – AA
B020 – AA
B025 – AA
B030 – AA
BX040 – AA
B040 – AA
B050 – AA
BX060 – AA 4
B060 – AA
B075 – AA
B100 – AA
B125 – AA
BX150 – AA
B150 – AA 9
B200 – AA 9
B250 – AA 9
BP250 – AA 7, 9
–
BX250A – AA 9
B300A – AA 9
BP300 – AA 7, 9
–
B350A – AA 9
BP350 – AA 7, 9
–
B400A – AA 9
BP400 – AA 7, 9
–
B450A – AA 9
BP450 – AA 7, 9
–
B500A – AA 9
B600A – AA 9
BRF05 – AE
BRF07 – AE
BRF10 – AE
BRF15 – AE
BRF20 – AE
BRF30 – AE
BRF50 – AE
BRF75 – AE
BRF100 – AE
BRF150 – AE
BRF200 – AE
B015 – AE
B020 – AE
B025 – AE
B030 – AE
BX040 – AE
B040 – AE
B050 – AE
BX060 – AE 4
B060 – AE
B075 – AE
B100 – AE
B125 – AE
BX150 – AE
B150 – AE 9
B200 – AE 9
B250 – AE 9
–
BPR250A – AE 7, 8 9
BX250A – AE 8, 9
B300A – AE 8, 9
–
BPR300A – AE 7, 8, 9
B350A – AE 8, 9
–
BPR350A – AE 7, 8, 9
B400A – AE 8, 9
–
BPR400A – AE 7, 8, 9
B450A – AE 8, 9
–
BPR450A – AE 7, 8, 9
B500A – AE 8, 9
B600A – AE 8, 9
BRF05 – AF
BRF07 – AF
BRF10 – AF
BRF15 – AF
BRF20 – AF
BRF30 – AF
BRF50 – AF
BRF75 – AF
BRF100 – AF
BRF150 – AF
BRF200 – AF
B015 – AF
B020 – AF
B025 – AF
B030 – AF
BX040 – AF
B040 – AF
B050 – AF
BX060 – AF 4
BRF05 – AJ
BRF07 – AJ
BRF10 – AJ
BRF15 – AJ
BRF20 – AJ
BRF30 – AJ
BRF50 – AJ
BRF75 – AJ
BRF100 – AJ
BRF150 – AJ
BRF200 – AJ
B015 – AJ
B020 – AJ
B025 – AJ
B030 – AJ
BX040 – AJ
B040 – AJ
B050 – AJ
BX060 – AJ 4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
See page 65 for footnotes.
1336 PLUS II Selection Guide
Constant/Variable Torque Drives and Enclosures
500-600V
Drive Rating 1
Amps
kW
CT HP
VT HP
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
158
252
284
300
350
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
56
75
93
112
149
187
224
261
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
298
400
400
300
350
400
450
500
600
224
261
298
336
373
448
300
350
400
450
500
600
300
350
400
450
500
600
Open
IP00
No Enclosure
NEMA Type 1
IP20
General Purpose
NEMA Type 4
IP65
Resist Water, Dust
NEMA Type 12
IP54
Industrial Use
CWF10 – AN
CWF20 – AN
CWF30 – AN
CWF50 – AN
CWF75 – AN
CWF100 – AN
CWF150 – AN
CWF200 – AN
C025 – AN
C030 – AN
C040 – AN
C050 – AN
C060 – AN
C075 – AN
C100 – AN
C125 – AN
C150 – AN
C200 – AN
C250 – AN
CX300 – AN
CP350 – AN 7
CPR350 – AN 7
CP400 – AN 7
CPR400 – AN 7
C300 – AN
C350 – AN
C400 – AN
C450 – AN
C500 – AN
C600 – AN
CWF10 – AA
CWF20 – AA
CWF30 – AA
CWF50 – AA
CWF75 – AA
CWF100 – AA
CWF150 – AA
CWF200 – AA
C025 – AA
C030 – AA
C040 – AA
C050 – AA
C060 – AA
C075 – AA
C100 – AA
C125 – AA
C150 – AA9
C200 – AA9
C250 – AA9
CX300 – AA9
CP350 – AA 7, 9
–
CP400 – AA 7, 9
CWF10 – AF
CWF20 – AF
CWF30 – AF
CWF50 – AF
CWF75 – AF
CWF100 – AF
CWF150 – AF
CWF200 – AF
C025 – AF
C030 – AF
C040 – AF
C050 – AF
CWF10 – AJ
CWF20 – AJ
CWF30 – AJ
CWF50 – AJ
CWF75 – AJ
CWF100 – AJ
CWF150 – AJ
CWF200 – AJ
C025 – AJ
C030 – AJ
C040 – AJ
C050 – AJ
CO60 – AF
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
CO60 – AJ
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
–
3
3
3
C300A – AA9
C350A – AA9
C400A – AA9
C450A – AA9
C500A – AA9
C600A – AA9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Language Group
Description
Language 5
English
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Spanish
Used
With . . .
Option Code
All Drives
-EN
-FR
-DE
-IT
-JP
-ES
Dynamic Brake Kits
Description
for 200-240V AC Drives
for 380-480V AC Drives
for 500-600V AC Drives
Used
With . . .
Catalog Number
Complete Brake
Catalog Number
Brake Chopper
0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) 6
5.5-7.5 kW (7.5-10 HP) 6
11-22 kW (15-30 HP) 6
30-56 kW (40-75 HP) 6
0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) 6
5.5-7.5 kW (7.5-10 HP) 6
11-37 kW (15-50 HP) 6
45-149 kW (60-200 HP) 6
0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) 6
5.5-7.5 kW (7.5-10 HP) 6
11-30 kW (15-40 HP) 6
37-149 kW (50-200 HP) 6
-KA005
-KA010
NA
NA
-KB005
-KB010
-KB050
NA
-KC005
-KC010
-KC050
NA
-WA018
-WA018
-WA070
-WA115
-WB009
-WB009
-WB035
-WB110
-WC009
-WC009
-WC035
-WC085
1 Drive rating is based on nominal voltage and carrier frequency at altitudes of 1000 meters or less. Refer to the Derating Guidelines on Pages 57-61.
2 VT /HP ratings are valid for 240V or 480V only.
3 Not available in this rating.
4 480 Volts only.
5 A Language Group must be specified with each drive for User Manual.
6 Multiple kits may be utilized together to obtain higher ratings. Refer to the appropriate brake publication (1336-5.64 or 5.65) for further information.
7 A “Common Mode Choke” option (-CM) or “No Common Mode Choke” option (-NCM) must be specified with each F Frame Drive.
8 These units include as standard an integral EMC filter.
9 This drive will not accept a “Snap-In” HIM (HASP, HAS1, HAS2, HCSP, HCS1, HCS2).
65
1336 PLUS II Selection Guide
Factory Installed Options
Description
Communication Options
Single Point RI0
RS232/422/485, DF1 & DH485 Protocol
DeviceNet
Enhanced DeviceNet
Communication Options
Single Point RI0 with Snap-In Cradle
RS232/422/485, DF1 & DH485 Protocol w/Snap-In Cradle
DeviceNet
Enhanced DeviceNet
Snap-In Cradle/Blank Plate
Control Interface
Contact Closure
+24V AC/DC
115V AC
Control Interface with Encoder Feedback
Contact Closure
+24V AC/DC
115V AC
Control Interface with Encoder Feedback5
Contact Closure
+24V AC/DC
115V AC
Analog Interface – Port A (Choose One)
Two Isolated Configurable Inputs
One Isolated Bi-Polar Input (±10V) and One Isolated Themistor Input
One Isolated Bi-polar Input (±10V) and One Isolated Configurable Input
Analog Interface – Port B (Choose One)
Single-ended, Non-isolated Input Configurable or Pot & 2 Single-ended, Non-isolated 0-20mA Outputs
Two Isolated Configurable Outputs
One Isolated Configurable Input & Output
One Isolated Pulse Input & Non-isolated Output and One Single-ended, Non-isolated 0-10V Output
Human Interface Module, Snap-In IP20
(NEMA Type 1)
Snap-In Cradle/Blank Plate
Programmer Only
Programmer Only & Upload/Download Capability
Programmer/Controller with Analog Pot
Programmer/Controller with Analog Pot & Upload/Download Capability
Programmer/Controller with Digital Pot
Programmer/Controller with Digital Pot & Upload/Download Capability
Human Interface Module, IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
Programmer Only
Programmer/Controller with Analog Pot
Programmer/Controller with Digital Pot
Human Interface Module, IP661
Programmer/Display Only
Programmer/Controller with Digital Pot
Used
With . . .
Frames B & Up
(Adapter 6 Only)
All Frames
(Adapter 1 Only)
Option Code
(Installed)
-GM13
-GM23
-GM53
-GM63
-GMS13
-GMS23
-GMS53
-GMS63
-HASB3
All Drives
-L4
-L5
-L6
All Drives
-L4E
-L5E
-L6E
All Drives
-L7E
-L8E
-L9E
All Drives
-LA2
-LA6
-LA7
All Drives
-LA1
-LA3
-LA4
-LA5
IP00 (Open) A-G Frame & IP20
(NEMA Type 1) A-D Frame Drives
-HASB
-HASP
-HCSP
-HAS1
-HCS1
-HAS2
-HCS2
IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
E-G Frame Enclosures
IP66 or IP54
(NEMA Type 12) Drives
-HAP2
-HA12
-HA22
-HJP
-HJ2
1 This option may be used on an IP65 or IP66 rated enclosure to meet watertight indoor applications.
2 Requires a Communication Option Cable (1202-Cxx) to be functional.
3 A maximum of one Communication Option may be ordered factory installed on A Frame drives (2 for B Frame drives and up, limited to 1-Snap-in and 1-Main
Control Board mount).
4 Each Flex I/O SCANport Module requires (1) 1203-FB1 and (1) 1203-FM1.
5 The encoder loss detection feature of the 1336 PLUS II requires the use of L7E, L8E or L9E.
66
1336 PLUS II Selection Guide
Field Installed Options
Description
Used
With . . .
Catalog No.
(Loose Kit)
Remote Mounted w/Integral 115V AC Power Supply
Single Point RIO
RS 232/422/485, DF1, DH485
All Drives
Remote Mounted for use with 24V DC Power Supply
Single Point RIO
RS232/422/485, DF1, DH485
DeviceNet
Enhanced DeviceNet
All Drives
Drive Mounted and Drive Powered
(with loose snap-in cradle/blank plate)
Single Point RIO
RS232/422/485, DF1, DH485 Protocol
DeviceNet
Enhanced DeviceNet
A Frame Drives –
Adapter 1 w/Snap-in
Cradle/Blank Plate
B Frame & Up –
Adapter 6 (or Adapter 1
w/Snap-in Cradle/Blank Plate)
1336-GM1 3
1336-GM2 3
1336-GM5 3
1336-GM6 3,5
Firmware Download Module
Module allows firmware upgrade
All Drives
1336F-FDM
ControlNet™ to SCANport Adapter
Remote Mounted (DIN Rail) - 24V DC
Requires 24V DC power supply
All Drives
1203-CN1 3,5
Smart Serial to SCANport Adapter
Includes 1203-SFC & 1202-C10 Cables
All Drives
1203-SSS
SCANport Expander Module
One to Two
One to Four
All Drives
1203-GD1 2
1203-GD2 2
1203-GK1 2
1203-GK2 2
1203-GK5 2
1203-GU6 2
1203-SG2
1203-SG4
Flex I/O SCANport Module 4
Flex I/O Terminal Base
Flex I/O Module
All Drives
HIM, Snap-In, IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
Snap-In Cradle/Blank Plate
Programmer Only
Programmer Only & Upload/Download Capability
Programmer/Controller with Analog Pot
Programmer/Controller with Analog Pot & Upload/Download Capability
Programmer/Controller with Digital Pot
Programmer/Controller with Digital Pot & Upload/Download Capability
IP00 (Open) A-G Frame & IP20
(NEMA Type 1) A-D Frame
Drives
HIM, Hand-Held, IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
Requires Cable Below
Programmer Only
Programmer/Controller w/Analog Speed Pot
Programmer/Controller w/Digital Speed Pot
IP20 (NEMA Type 1) E-G Frame
Enclosures
HIM IP66 (NEMA Type 12/UL Type 4X-Indoor)
Programmer Only
Programmer/Controller w/Digital Speed Pot
IP66 (NEMA Type
12/UL Type 4X
Indoor) Enclosures
Option Cable Kit - Connect to Comm. Port
0.33 Meters (1.1 Feet)
1 Meter (3.3 Feet)
3 Meter (9.8 Feet)
9 Meter (29.5 Feet)
All HIMs not mounted
on the drive chassis
Door Mount Bezel Kit, IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
User Supplied IP20
(NEMA Type 1)
Enclosures and HIM
1336-FB1
1336-FM1
1201-HASB
1201-HASP
1201-HCSP
1201-HAS1
1201-HCS1
1201-HAS2
1201-HCS2
1201-HAP
1201-HA1
1201-HA2
1201-HJP 2
1201-HJ2 2
1202-CO3
1202-C10
1202-C30
1202-C90
1201-DMA
1 This option may be used on an IP65 or IP66 rated enclosure to meet watertight indoor applications.
2 Requires a Communication Option Cable (1202-Cxx) to be functional.
3 A maximum of one Communication Option may be drive mounted.
4 Each Flex I/O SCANport Module requires (1) 1203-FB1 and (1) 1203-FM1.
5 Adapter is programmed/configured with Windows™ HyperTerminal via RS-232 using the 1203-SFC cable (purchased separately), or using a compatible network
specific software tool.
67
1336 PLUS II Selection Guide
Notes
68
1336 PLUS II Configured Drives
1336 PLUS II Configured Drives
Table of Contents
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS
Input and Output Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Standard AC Line Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
OPTIONS
Suggested Power Distribution Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Disconnects, Control Transformers, Overload Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Bypass- Auto, Manual, SMC, Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Multi-pulse Front Ends, Motor Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Power Conditioning, Control and Feedback, Communication. . . . . . . 77
PLC and SLC, Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Human Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Door Mounted Operator Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Operator Device Functionality, Meter Options, Enclosure Options. . . 81
Codes and Standards, Drawing and Test Options, Firmware. . . . . . . 82
ENCLOSURE SPECIFICATIONS
Installation Guidelines, Enclosure Types (NEMA/IEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Material Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Mounting and Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
DIMENSIONS
NEMA Type 1 (IP20), A-C Frame Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NEMA Type 4 & 12 (IP65 & IP54), A-C Frame Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NEMA Type 1 & 12 (IP20 & IP54), D-E Frame Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
NEMA Type 1 & 12 (IP20 & IP54), F Frame Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NEMA Type 1 & 12 (IP20 & IP54), G Frame Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
PANEL LAYOUTS
Drive Frame A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Drive Frame B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Drive Frame C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Drive Frame D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Drive Frame E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Drive Frame F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Drive Frame G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
WIRE TERMINATIONS
Power Terminal Block TB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Control and Signal Wiring Terminal Block TB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Control Interface Wiring Terminal Block TB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
SELECTION GUIDE
Catalog Number Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Thermal Overload Relay Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Heater Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Option Selection Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
30 HP NEMA TYPE 1 Configured Drive with Option Enclosure
DRAWING SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
69
Product Description
The 1336 PLUS II Drive Configured Drive Package
The heart of every configured drive package is a 1336 PLUS II variable frequency controller.
The configured drives program provides 1336 PLUS II drives packaged with a much larger offering of factory mounted options than what is
normally available with a standard product.
Ratings are provides for 0.37-93 kW (0.5-125 HP) at 230V, 0.37-448 kW (0.5-600 HP) at 460V, or 0.75-448 kW (1-600 HP) at 575V. Separate
constant torque and variable torque ratings are available for 460V applications.
Packaging
Removable common Human Interface Module.
Provides simplicity of programming and flexibility of operation.
Thermal dissipation management.
Design and extensive infra-red testing minimizes hot spots to maximize reliability.
Modular enclosure.
Design to accommodate a wide variety of drive ratings and option combinations.
IP 20, IP65 & IP54 (NEMA Type 1, 4 & 12) configurations.
Accommodated with “heat sink through the back” design wherever possible.
Standardization
Pre-defined to reduce cost and time.
By using pre-defined, and in most cases pre-engineered, options standardization provides consistency of product offering, resulting in
reduced costs, shorter delivery time, and ease of product installation. Even in the case of custom designed drive packages, generally 80%
of the engineering already exists.
Drive Specifications
General Specifications
In most cases the general specifications of a configured drive package will match those of a stand-alone drive, refer to pages 18 and 19.
Some items such as Agency Certification and Maximum Short Circuit Protection will be specific to the configured drive options chosen.
Agency Certification
Refer to the Codes and Standards in the Options section
Maximum Short Circuit Drive Package
(Current Rating)
The short circuit interrupt capability of any configured drive package will be based upon the specific
combination of power options chosen
70
Drive Specifications
Input and Output Ratings
Each 1336 PLUS II Drive has
constant and variable torque
capabilities. In the case of
230V and 575V ratings, the
constant torque and variable
torque ratings will be the
same.The listings on this page
provide input and output
current.1
230V
HP
Cat No.
Constant Torque
Input
Input
kVA
Amps
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
AF05C
AF07C
AF10C
AF15C
AF20C
AF30C
AF50C
A007C
A010C
A015C
A020C
A025C
A030C
A040C
A050C
A060C
A075C
A100C
A125C
1.1
1.4
2.2
2.9
3.9
5.7
8.5
10-12
12-14
17-20
22-26
26-31
27-33
41-49
52-62
62-74
82-99
100-120
112-134
HP
Cat No.
Constant Torque
Input
Input
kVA
Amps
Output
kVA
Output
Amps
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
7.5
10
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60 2
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
—
250
300
300
350
350
400
400
450
450
500
600
BFO5C
BFO7C
BF10C
BF15C
BF20C
BF30C
BF50C
B007C
BF75C
B010C
BF100C
B015C
B020C
B025C
B030C
BX040C
B050C
BX060C
B060C
B075C
B100C
B125C
BX150C
B150C
B200C
B250C
—
BP250C
B300C
BP300C
B350C
BP350C
B400C
BP400C
B450C
BP450C
B500C
B600C
0.9-1
1.3-1.6
1.6-2
2.2-2.6
3.0-3.7
4.2-5.1
6.6-8
8-11
9.5-11.6
11-14
12.2-14.7
16-21
21-26
26-33
30-38
40-50
48-60
62
54-68
69-87
90-114
113-143
148
130-164
172-217
212-268
—
212-268
228-288
235-297
261-330
277-350
294-371
310-392
326-412
347-438
372-470
437-552
0.9
1.3
1.6
2.2
3
4.2
6.7
10
11.2
13
13.9
19
25
31
36
47
60
61
68
84
110
138
143
159
210
259
—
259
279
287
319
339
359
378
398
424
454
534
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
12.5
14
16.1
17.5
24.2
31
39
45
59
75
77
85
106
138
173
180
199
263
325
—
325
360
360
425
425
475
475
525
532
590
670
HP
Cat No.
Constant Torque
Input
Input
kVA
Amps
Output
kVA
Output
Amps
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
300
350
400
450
500
600
CF10C
CF20C
CF30C
CF50C
C007C
C010C
C015C
C020C
C025C
C030C
C040C
C050C
C060C
C075C
C100C
C125C
C150C
C200C
C250C
CX300C
C300C
C350C
C400C
C450C
C500C
C600C
2.1-2.5
4.2-5
6.2-7.5
8.3-10
9-11
11-13
17-20
21-26
27-32
31-37
38-45
48-57
52-62
73-88
94-112
118-142
144-173
216-260
244-293
256-307
258-309
301-361
343-412
386-464
429-515
515-618
2.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
137
167
252
283
297
299
349
398
448
498
598
2
4
6
8
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
168
252
384
300
300
350
400
450
500
600
2.8
3.5
5.4
7.3
9.7
14.3
21.3
28
35
49
63
75
79
119
149
178
238
289
322
Output
kVA
Output
Amps
0.9
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
11
14
19
26
31
32
48
60
72
96
116
129
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
27
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
460V
1.3
2
2.8
3.3
4.6
6.4
10
13
14.5
17
18.5
25
32
40
46
61
73
75
82
105
137
172
178
197
261
322
—
322
347
357
397
421
446
471
496
527
565
664
HP
Cat No.
Variable Torque
Input
Input
kVA
Amps
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
7.5
10
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
BF05V
BF07V
BF10V
BF15V
BF20V
BF30V
BF50V
BX007V
BF75V
B007V
BF100V
B010V
B015V
B020V
B030V
BX040V
B040V
BX060V
0.9-1.1
1.4-1.7
1.8-2.2
2.3-2.8
3.2-3.8
4.7-5.7
7.0-8.5
8-11
12.2-14.7
9-12
17.1-20.7
14-18
18-23
23-29
32-41
40-50
41-52
62
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.5
4.8
7.2
10.7
13
18.5
14
26
22
28
35
49
61
63
75
1
1.4
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
10
13.9
11
19.9
17
22
27
38
47
52
61
1.2
1.7
2.3
3
4
6
9
12.5
17.5
14
25
21
27
34
48
59
65
77
75
100
125
150
B060V
B075V
B100V
B125V
61-77
78-99
98-124
117-148
93
119
149
178
76
96
120
143
96
120
150
180
200
250
250
—
300
300
350
350
400
400
450
450
500
600
B150V
B200V
B250V
—
BX250V
BP250V
B300V
BP300V
B350V
BP350V
B400V
BP400V
B450V
B500V
157-198
191-241
212-268
—
228-288
235-297
261-330
277-350
294-371
310-392
326-412
347-438
372-470
437-552
238
290
322
—
347
357
397
421
446
471
496
527
565
664
191
233
259
—
279
287
319
339
359
378
398
424
454
534
240
292
325
—
360
360
425
425
475
475
525
532
590
670
Output
kVA
Output
Amps
575V
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10
12
19
25
31
36
44
55
60
84
108
137
167
250
282
295
297
347
397
446
496
595
1 Drive ratings are at nominal values. Refer to
the Drive Derating Guidelines in the Standard
Drives section.
2 480V only.
71
Drive Specifications
Standard AC Line Fusing
Drive input fuses are supplied as standard with any configured drive package. The fuses provide branch circuit protection for the
drive. Generally fuses and fuse blocks are supplied. F frame drives will have the fuses mounted internally to the drive itself. If a Drive
Disconnect Switch option is supplied, the fuses will be resident on that switch (except F frame drives). Configured drives may have different
input fuse ratings than those recommended for equivalent standard 1336 PLUS II drives. This is because configured drives are rated for a
single input voltage as opposed to the voltage range of a standard product.
Drive Rating and Catalog Number
230V AC
HP
230V AC
Cat No.
460V AC-CT
HP
460V AC-CT
Cat No.
460V AC-VT
HP
460V AC-VT
Cat No.
575V AC
HP
575V AC
Cat No.
Fuse
Description
Quantity
Required
Vendor
Part Number
—
0.5-0.75
—
0.5-0.75
BF05C, BF07C
0.5-0.75
BF05V, BF07V
1
CF10C
3A
3
Bussmann LPJ-3
AF05C-AF07C
1-1.5
BF10C, BF15C
1-1.5
BF10V, BF15V
2
CF20C
6A
3
Bussmann LPJ-6
1
AF10C
2
BF20C
2
BF20V
3
CF30C
10A
3
Bussmann LPJ-10
1.5-2
AF15C-AF20C
3
BF30C
3
BF30V
5-7.5
CF50C, CF75C
15A
3
Bussmann LPJ-15
—
—
5-7.5 (14A)
BF50C, BF75C
5, 10 (17.5A)
BF50V, BF75V
10
CF100C
20A
3
Bussmann LPJ-20
3
AF30C
—
—
—
—
15
CF150C
25A
3
Bussmann LPJ-25
—
—
10 (17.5A)
BF100C
15 (25A)
BF100V
20
CF200C
30A
3
Bussmann LPJ-30
—
—
15
BF150C(24A), BF200C
20
BF200V
—
—
35A
3
Bussmann LPJ-35
5
AF50C
—
—
—
—
—
—
40A
3
Bussmann LPJ-40
—
—
15
B015C
—
—
—
—
35A
3
Bussmann JKS-35
7.5
A007C
—
—
—
—
25
C025C
40A
3
Bussmann JKS-40
—
—
20
B020C
25
B020V
—
—
45A
3
Bussmann JKS-45
10
A010C
—
—
—
—
30
C030C
50A
3
Bussmann JKS-50
—
—
25
B025C
—
—
40
C040C
60A
3
Bussmann JKS-60
15
A015C
30
B030C
30
B030V
—
—
70A
3
Bussmann JKS-70
—
—
40
BX040C
40-50
BX040V, B040V
50
C050C
80A
3
Bussmann JKS-80
—
—
—
—
—
—
60
C060C
90A
3
Bussmann JKS-90
20-25
A020C-A025C
50-60
B050C, BX060C
60
BX060V
—
—
100A
3
Bussmann JKS-100
—
—
—
—
—
—
75
C075C
110A
3
Bussmann JKS-110
30
A030C
60
B060C
75
B060V
125A
3
Bussmann JKS-125
A040C
75
B075C
100
B075V
—
100
—
40
C100C
150A
3
Bussmann JKS-150
—
—
—
—
—
—
125
C125C
175A
3
Bussmann JKS-175
50
A050C
100
B100C
125
B100V
—
—
200A
3
Bussmann JKS-200
—
—
—
—
—
—
150
C150C
225A
3
Bussmann JKS-225
60
A060C
125-150
B125C, B150C
150
B125V
—
—
250A
3
Bussmann JKS-250
75
A075C
150
B150C
200
B150V
—
—
300A
3
Bussmann JKS-300
—
—
—
—
—
—
200
C200C
350A
3
Bussmann JKS-350
100
A100C
200
B200C
250
B200V
250-300
C250C, CX300C
400A
3
Bussmann JKS-400
—
—
—
—
—
—
300
C300C
400A
3
Gould A2-70C400AT
125
A125C
250
B250C
250
B250V
—
—
450A
3
Bussmann JKS-450
—
—
300
B300C
300-350
BX250V, B300V
350
C350C
450A
3
Gould A3-70C450AT
—
—
—
250
BP250C
300
BP250V
—
—
450A
3
Gould A70QS-450
350
B350C
400
B350V
400
C400C
500A
3
Gould A3-70C500AT
—
—
300
BP300C
350
BP300V
—
3
Gould A70QS-500
400
B400C
450
B400V
450
—
C450C
500A
—
600A
3
Gould A3-70C600AT
—
—
350-400
BP350C, BP400C
400
BP350V
—
—
600A
3
Gould A70QS-600
—
—
—
450
BP450C
450
BP400V
—
3
Gould A70QS-700
450-500
B450C, B500C
500-600
B450V, B500V
500-600
—
C500C, C600C
700A
—
800A
3
Gould A3-70C800AT
—
—
600
B600C
—
—
—
—
900A
3
Gould A3-70C900AT
—
—
72
Options
Suggested Power Distribution Schemes
The power distribution schemes shown below are for typical configurations and offered as suggestions only. Actual specified configurations
may vary with accepted design practices or code restrictions.
Bypass/System
Non-Fused
Disconnect
Option -DT
Bypass/System
Circuit
Breaker
Option -CC
Drive Circuit Breaker
(Option CB)
Circuit Breaker
Option -CB
Input Contactor
Option KD 4
1336
PLUS II
Drive
1336
PLUS II
Drive
Output Contactor
Option -KM
Thermal Overload Relay
Option -MK or -MT 1
AC
Motor
5
Drive Branch
Fusing (Std.)3
Drive Branch
Fusing (Std.)
Drive Branch Fusing
(Std.)
Drive Branch Fusing
(Std.)
Disconnect
Option -DS 3
Circuit Breaker
Option -CB
1336
PLUS II
Drive
Output Contactor
Option -KM
Thermal Overload Relay
Option -MK or -MT 1
AC
Motor
12 and 18
Pulse
MP12A
MP12N
MP18A
MP18N
Motor
Branch
Fusing
Option
-FM 2
Drive
Circuit
Breaker
Option -CB
Motor
Branch
Fusing
Option
-FM 2
Drive
Disconnect
Option -DS 3
Drive Branch
Fusing (Std.)
Drive Branch
Fusing (Std.)3
Input Contactor
Option KD 4
Input Contactor
Option KD 4
1336
PLUS II
Drive
1336
PLUS II
Drive
1336
PLUS II
Drive
Thermal Overload Relay
Option -MK or -MT 1
Output Line Reactor
(Option LQ or LW)
Bypass
Options
-BA or -BM
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
Bypass
Options
-BA or -BM
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
Bypass/System
Circuit
Breaker
Option -CC
Circuit Breaker
Option -CB
Motor Branch
Fusing
Option - FM2
SMC
Fusing
Drive Branch
Fusing (Std.)
Circuit Breaker
Option -CB
Motor Branch
Fusing
Option - FM2
SMC
Fusing
Drive Branch
Fusing (Std.)
Input Contactor
Option KD 4
SMC
PLUS
1336
PLUS II
Drive
SMC Bypass Options
-BS, -BD, -BP or -BC
Disconnect
Option -DS 3
Motor Branch
Fusing
Option - FM2
SMC
Fusing
Drive Branch
Fusing (Std.)3
Input Contactor
Option KD 4
SMC
PLUS
1336
PLUS II
Drive
Input Contactor
Option KD 4
SMC
PLUS
1336
PLUS II
Drive
SMC Bypass Options
-BS, -BD, -BP or -BC
SMC Bypass Options
-BS, -BD, -BP or -BC
AC
Motor
Bypass/System
Non-Fused
Disconnect
Option -DT
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
1 This option is redundant to the existing electronic overload protection supplied by the drive as standard.
2 If the motor branch fusing option (-FM) or the bypass/system circuit breaker option (-CC) are not specified,
the user must supply motor branch circuit protection.
3 Standard drive branch fusing will be located on the optional drive disconnect switch, if supplied
(except F and G Frame drives).
4 For F Frame drive ratings – the input contactor option will be located ahead of the internal drive branch fusing.
73
Options
Power Disconnect Options
Drive Input Fuses
(Standard)
This is a standard feature of all configured drive packages. These fuses provide branch circuit
protection in the drive mode of operation. If a bypass option is included, then separate branch circuit
protection may be supplied by the customer or by specifying option -FM. Refer to AC Line Fusing
in the Drive Specifications section for specific fuse rating information.
Drive Circuit Breaker
(Option CB)
This option is for disconnecting power only, and is not intended for branch circuit protection.The
standard drive input fuses supply branch circuit protection. Most ratings will utilize a motor circuit
protector (MCP) type breaker. Where MCP’s are not available a molded case switch will be provided.
All switches include handle operators, door interlocking and are padlockable. Thermal magnetic type
breakers are not required since this type of protection is already supplied in the drive.
Drive Disconnect Switch
(Option DS)
An Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R rotary switch is provided on A-C frame drives. A flange mount or
rotary style switch (1494 F where possible) is provided on D frame drives and larger. With the
exception of the F frame drive, the drive input fuses will be resident on the switch, allowing it to
meet the requirements for branch circuit protection. All disconnect switches are door interlocked
and padlockable.
Drive Input Contactor
(Option KD)
An Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 contactor (where available) is provided between the AC line and the
drive. The contactor will close on power up using A-B circuitry, or may be alternately controlled by
customer supplied remote contact closure logic.
Drive Output Contactor
(Option KM)
An Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 contactor (where available) is provided between the drive output
and the motor. The contactor will close on power up, and open after a drive fault or loss of power.
Control Power Options
Drive Only Control Power
(Option CF)
This option provides a control power transformer mounted and wired inside the drive enclosure.
The transformer is rated for drive and options power only. There is no additional capacity for
customer use.
Drive Plus 250VA Control Power
(Option CP)
This option provides a control power transformer mounted and wired inside the drive enclosure.
The transformer is rated for drive power plus an additional 250VA at 120V AC for customer use.
Drive Plus 500VA Control Power
(Option CT)
This option provides a control power transformer mounted and wired inside the drive enclosure.
The transformer is rated for drive power plus an additional 500VA at 120V AC for customer use.
Thermal Overload Relay Options
Class 10 Motor Thermal Overload Relay
(Option MT)
This option provides an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 193 bi-metallic thermal overload relay. The Bulletin 193
contains an integral heater element with an adjustable trip setting – refer to Motor Thermal Overload
Relay Selection in the Selection Guide section. No additional heater elements are required. A Class 10
overload relay will trip in 10 seconds or less at 600% of motor current setting. The motor overload
protection provided by this option is redundant to the electronic overload protection provided by the
drive itself.
Class 20 Motor Thermal Overload Relay
(Option MK)
This option provides an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 592 thermal overload relay. The Bulletin 592 contains
a manual reset and requires a eutectic alloy heater element – refer to Heater Element Selection in the
Selection Guide section. The heater element is not supplied with this option because specific motor
data generally is not known. A Class 20 overload relay will trip in 20 seconds or less at 600% of motor
current setting. The motor overload protection provided by this option is redundant to the electronic
overload protection provided by the drive itself.
Bypass Options
Where system downtime cannot be tolerated, a bypass option can be provided to allow the motor to run at base speed by operating across the line.
Manual Bypass 1, 2, 3
(Option BM)
74
This option provides a means to manually switch a single motor from drive control to bypass (across
the line) operation. Separate Bulletin 100 (where available) contactors are provided for drive output
and bypass operation, and are electrically interlocked. A Bulletin 193 Class 10 overload is also provided
for motor protection while operating in the bypass mode – refer to Motor Thermal Overload Data
in the Selection Guide section. A door-mounted “Drive/Off/Bypass” selector switch is provided.
Optional “Drive Mode” and “Bypass Mode” pilot lights are available (option D41).
Options
Bypass Options (continued)
Automatic Bypass 1, 2, 3
(Option BA)
This option provides a means to manually or automatically (upon a drive fault) switch a single motor
from drive control to bypass (across the line) operation. Separate Bulletin 100 (where available)
contactors are provided for drive output and bypass operation, and are electrically interlocked. A
Bulletin 193 Class 10 overload is also provided for motor protection while operating in the bypass
mode – refer to Motor Thermal Overload Data in the Selection Guide section. Door-mounted
“Drive/Off/Bypass” and “Auto Bypass Off/On” selector switches are provided. Optional “Bypass Mode”
and “Auto Bypass Enable On” pilot lights are available (option D42).
Manual Bypass with SMC Plus 1, 2, 3
(Option BS)
This option provides a means to manually switch a single motor from drive control to bypass
(across the line) operation. An SMC Plus™ solid state controller provides soft start capability when first
switching to bypass operation. Separate Bulletin 100 (where available) contactors are provided for drive
output, SMC output and total bypass. All contactors are electrically interlocked. A door-mounted
“Drive/Off/Bypass” selector switch is provided. Optional “Drive Mode” and “Bypass Mode” pilot lights
are available (option D41).
Automatic Bypass with SMC Plus 1, 2, 3
(Option BD)
This option provides a means to manually or automatically (upon a drive fault) switch a single motor
from drive control to bypass (across the line) operation. An SMC Plus solid state controller provides
soft start capability when first switching to bypass operation. Separate Bulletin 100 (where available)
contactors are provided for drive output, SMC output and total bypass. All contactors are electrically
interlocked. Door-mounted “Drive/Off/Bypass” and “Auto Bypass Off/On” selector switches are
provided. Optional “Bypass Mode” and “Auto Bypass Enable On” pilot lights are available (option D42).
Manual Bypass with SMC Plus /
Pump Option 1, 2, 3
(Option BP)
This option provides a means to manually switch a single motor from drive control to bypass
(across the line) operation. An SMC Plus (with the pump control option) solid state controller provides
soft start and smooth acceleration capability when first switching to bypass operation and smooth
deceleration when stopping in bypass. Separate Bulletin 100 (where available) contactors are provided
for drive output, SMC output and total bypass. All contactors are electrically interlocked. A doormounted “Drive/Off/Bypass” selector switch is provided. Optional “Drive Mode” and “Bypass Mode”
pilot lights are available (option D41).
Automatic Bypass with SMC Plus/
Pump Option 1, 2, 3
(Option BC)
This option provides a means to manually or automatically (upon a drive fault) switch a single motor
from drive control to bypass (across the line) operation. An SMC Plus (with the pump control option)
solid state controller provides soft start and smooth acceleration capability when first switching to
bypass operation and smooth deceleration when stopping in bypass. Separate Bulletin 100 (where
available) contactors are provided for drive output, SMC output and total bypass. All contactors are
electrically interlocked. Door-mounted “Drive/Off/Bypass” and “Auto Bypass Off/On” selector switches
are provided. Optional “Bypass Mode” and “Auto Bypass Enable On” pilot lights are available
(option D42).
Bypass Mode Circuit Breaker
(Option CC)
This option is for disconnecting power only, and is not intended for branch circuit protection.
Branch circuit protection is provided by the bypass fusing option -FM. Most ratings will utilize a motor
circuit protector (MCP) type breaker. Where MCP’s are not available a circuit breaker will be provided.
All switches include handle operators, door interlocking and are padlockable.
Bypass Mode Non-Fused Disconnect Switch
(Option DT)
This option is for disconnecting power only, and is not intended for branch circuit protection. Branch
circuit protection is provided by the bypass fusing option -FM. An Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R rotary
switch is provided on A-C frame drives. A flange mount or rotary style switch (1494 F where possible) is
provided on D frame drives and larger. All disconnect switches are non-fusible, door interlocked and
padlockable.
Bypass Mode Motor Fuse Block
(Option FM)
This option provides a fuse block only. Fuses must be customer supplied and installed.
This option is used in conjunction with any bypass option for motor branch circuit protection.
1 The Bypass Operation capability provided by this option is not intended for maintenance of the drive or entry into the enclosure with power applied while
operating in the bypass mode. Maintenance Bypass (positive lockout) is available as a custom option.
2 Bypass Options do not include the required 120V AC control power. Control power may be supplied remotely by the user, or as part of the drive package by
ordering a Control Power option CF, CP or CT – see Options section.
3 SMC style bypass options will include short circuit fusing for the SMC. Once the motor is up to speed it is transferred from the SMC control to total across-the-line
operation, which required option FM to have branch circuit protection.
75
Options
Multi-Pulse Harmonic Mitigation Option
This 1336 PLUS II drive may be quoted with a multi-pulse front end option for use in harmonic mitigation. This feature reduces drive harmonics at the drive
input that could be reflected back to the power distribution system. Excessive harmonics can cause component overheating, nuisance tripping and noise
transfer to other load surfaces. The hardware supplied with this option will include line fusing, phase shifting input transformer and an AC to DC diode type
converter bridge. The traditional AC fed 1336 PLUS II drive will be replaced by a DC common bus equivalent.
Guidelines for Harmonic Specification IEEE519-1992
This is a North American standard developed from input provided by utilities, electrical equipment manufacturers and power consumers. Total harmonic
distortion limits are recommended based upon the type of installation. Important: For compliance to this standard refer to the description in the
specific option detailed below. For more information on harmonic mitigation and the IEEE519-1992 standard refer to publication
Drives-BR007A-EN-P.
12 Pulse Front End with Auto Transformer
(Option MP12A)
This option provides a 12 pulse drive front end fed by a 12 pulse auto transformer. It does not
guarantee meeting the guidelines of harmonic specification IEEE519-1992 without a detailed harmonic
analysis.
12 Pulse Front End with Isolation Transformer
(Option MP12N)
This option provides a 12 pulse drive front end fed by a 12 pulse isolation transformer. It does not
guarantee meeting the guidelines of harmonic specification IEEE519-1992 without a detailed harmonic
analysis.
18 Pulse Front End with Auto Transformer
(Option MP18A)
This option provides an 18 pulse drive front end fed by an 18 pulse auto transformer. It will meet the
guidelines of IEEE519-1992 at the drive input terminals provided the input power phases are balanced
to within 1%.
18 Pulse Front End with Isolation Transformer
(Option MP18N)
This option provides an 18 pulse drive front end fed by an 18 pulse isolation transformer. It will meet
the guidelines of IEEE519-1992 at the drive input terminals provided the input power phases are
balanced to within 2%.
Motor Interface Options
Blower Motor Starter
(Option MB)
This option provides blower motor fusing, an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 contactor and an Allen-Bradley
Bulletin 193 Class 10 thermal overload relay. The blower starter is electrically interlocked with the drive
enable function or the bypass contactor (if bypass is provided and selected). The blower motor will be
assumed to be 1 HP unless motor data is supplied with the order.
Motor Heater Control
(Option MH)
(Option MH2) 4
This option provides the drive control circuitry for an existing motor heater. The heater is interlocked
with the drive run relay and will be energized whenever the motor is not running. Option includes a
white Motor Heater On pilot light mounted on the enclosure door.
(Option MH) Customer supplied remote 120VAC/360W power
(Option MH2) 120VAC supplied from drive package
RTD Protection Module
This option provides a door-mounted RTD sensing module for over temperature and under temperature
protection. Each unit will monitor up to (8) motor mounted RTD’s and has (3) output relays for alarm, trip
and fault. Customer contacts are rated 5A-250V AC res.
(Option N6A)
120 Ohm Nickel RTD
(Option N7A)
10 Ohm Copper RTD
(Option N8A)
100 Ohm Platinum RTD
Power Conditioning Options
NEMA Type 1 Line Reactor 5
(Option LR)
Input
(Option LQ)
Output
This option provides an open core line reactor which mounts inside the NEMA Type 1 drive enclosure.
This option may require a larger enclosure than the standard.
Reactor Specifications:
Iron core, 3% impedance, Class H insulation, 115°C rise,
copper wound, 50/60 Hz.
NEMA Type 4/12 Line Reactor 5
(Option LT)
Input
(Option LW)
Output
This option provides an open core line reactor which mounts inside NEMA Type 4 or 12 drive enclosures.
This non-ventilated construction will often require a larger enclosure than the same option in a
NEMA-type 1 box.
Reactor Specifications:
Iron core, 3% impedance, Class H insulation, 115°C rise,
copper wound, 50/60 Hz.
Common Mode Choke 5
(Option CM)
This option will help reduce the common mode noise at the drive output, and help guard against
nuisance tripping of the drive caused by capacitive leakage effects. Capacitive currents are larger at
higher PWM frequencies.
76
Options
Control and Feedback Options
Auxiliary Contacts
(Option JM)
Alarm
(Option JT)
At Speed
(Option JC)
Control Power On
(Option JF)
Drive Fault
(Option JR)
Drive Run
Contacts
Available
230V AC
460V AC-CT 460V AC-VT
575V AC
Figure 1
0.5-125 HP
0.5-200 HP
0.5-250 (292A) HP
1-300 HP
Figure 2
—
250-600 HP
250 (325A)-600 HP 350-600 HP
Isolated Analog Input
(Option N3)
This option provides an isolator for the analog input speed reference to the drive and is mounted and
wired in the drive enclosure. The default (as shipped) setting will be to accept a remote 4-20mA input.
The isolator may be reconfigured by the user to accept any input signal in the range of 0-256V DC or 0100mA, with or without offset and optional inverse operation. This option is generally required
when both a local speed pot and a remote speed input are utilized.
Analog Inputs/Outputs 7
All isolated I/O are designed with full galvanic isolation. This results in an isolation withstand
capability of 200V AC from each channel to True Earth (TE) ground and between channels.
Analog Interface – Port B (Choose One)
Analog Interface – Port A (Choose One)
LA1C Single-ended, Non-isolated Configurable or Pot &
LA2C Two Isolated Configurable Inputs
2 Single-ended, Non-isolated Outputs
LA6C One Isolated Bi-polar Input (±10V or
(1-Configurable, 1-20mA)
± 20mA) and one Isolated Thermistor
LA3C Two Isolated Configurable Outputs
Input
LA4C One Isolated Configurable Input & Output
LA7C One Isolated Bi-polar Input (±10V) and
LA5C One Isolated Pulse Input & Output and
One Isolated Configurable Input
One Single-ended, Non-isolated Configurable
Output
3-15 PSI Transducer (Local) Feedback
(Option N4C) Speed Command
(Option N4T) Speed Trim
This option provides a 4-wire, 3-15 PSI transducer mounted inside the enclosure. The transducer accepts
air pressure only with a 1⁄4" NPT fitting and generates an isolated output of 4-20mA proportional to
the input pressure. The 4-20mA signal is fed to the drive as either a speed command or speed trim.
3-15 PSI Transducer (Remote) Feedback
(Option N5C) Speed Command
(Option N5T) Speed Trim
This option provides a 2-wire, 3-15 PSI transducer as a loose item for remote mounting.The transducer
accepts air or fluid pressure with a 1⁄4” NPT fitting and generates an isolated output of 4-20mA proportional
to the input pressure. The 4-20mA signal is fed to the drive as either a speed command or speed trim.
Communication Options
Single Point RIO 6, 7
(Option GM1C, GD1C or GMS1C)
RIO communication options provide a single point remote I/O interface board. The board can be
configured for 1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4 or full rack with a baud rate of 57.6, 115, or 230 kBaud. The remote I/O
Board may be set up by the user to control drive logic, control speed reference commands, monitor
drive status and monitor drive logic.
RS232/422/485, DF1 or DH485 Protocol 6, 7
(Option GM2C, GD2C or GMS2C)
Communication interface module
DeviceNet 6, 7
(Option GM5C, GMS5C,
GM6C, GMS6C or GU6C)
DeviceNet to scanport module
1 The Bypass Operation capability provided by this option does not allow for maintenance of the drive or entry into the enclosure
with power applied while operating in the bypass mode.
2 Bypass Options do not include the required 120V AC control power. Control power may be supplied remotely by the user,
or as part of the drive package by ordering a Control Power option CF, CP or CT – see Options section.
3 Where branch circuit protection is required in the drive, option FM should be specified – see Options section.
4 Requires a control power transformer option CF, CP or CT.
5 Contact Allen-Bradley for possible drive enclosure size changes when selecting this option.
6 GM Series Options are drive mounted (maximum of one). GD Series Options are panel mounted, and require 120V AC power.
GU Series Options are panel mounted and require 24V DC power.
7 For more information refer to the Standard Drives section.
77
Options
PLC and SLC Control Options
PLC Hardware and Mounting 1, 2
(Option JL)
This options provides PLC hardware mounted in the drive or option enclosure.
Option includes a maximum of: 4 Position Rack (1771-A1B)
16 Amp Power Supply (1771-P1)
(no programming included)
SLC 500™ Hardware and Mounting 1, 2
(Option JS)
This options provides SLC 500 hardware mounted in the drive or option enclosure.
Option includes a maximum of: 4 Position Rack (1746-A4)
Power Supply (1746-P1)
(No programming included)
Control Interface Options
All 1336 PLUS II Configured Drives come with a 115V AC Control Interface Card (Option L6) as standard unless otherwise specified.
24V AC/DC control and Contact Closure control are available as options. Encoder feedback is also available as an option with any
of the three control methods.
All control interface cards provide input terminals for access to fixed drive functions that include start, stop, auxiliary fault, line loss, output contactor close,
speed select, sync, traverse, reset, and enable. Additional inputs are programmed for functions such as reverse, preset speed access, jog, second accel/decel
time access and local control selection. The function of each input is defined through programming. For Configured Drives, functions are pre-programmed at
the factory for a specific application and configuration and should not require field programming.
Operator control devices provided as part of the drive package will be interfaced to these same input terminals. All control input terminals are optically
isolated from the drive internal control logic.
Optional encoder feedback is available for use with single-ended or differential type encoders. When using a single ended encoder there is a 12V DC power
supply available for customer use. Differential encoders will require a user supplied power supply.
Contact Closure Control Interface 3
(Option L4C) Without Encoder Feedback
(Option L7EC) With Encoder Feedback
Circuits used with Option L4C or L7EC must be capable of operating with low = true logic.
In the low state,external circuits must be capable of a sinking current of approximately 10 mA to pull
the terminal voltage low to 3.0V DC or less.
In the high state, external circuits must allow the terminal voltage to rise to a voltage of 4.0-5.0V DC.
Note: Reed type input devices are recommended.
The L4C/L7EC option is compatible with the following Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
• 1771-OYL
• 1771-OZL
+24V AC/DC Control Interface 3
(Option L5C) Without Encoder Feedback
(Option L8EC) With Encoder Feedback
Circuits used with Option L5C or L8EC must be capable of operating with high = true logic.
DC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 8V DC.
Leakage current must be less than 1.5 mA into a 2.5k ohm load.
AC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 10V AC. Leakage current
must be less than 2.5 mA into a 2.5k ohm load.
Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a voltage of +20 to +26 volts and
source a current of approximately 10 mA for each input.
The L5C/L8EC option is compatible with the following Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
• 1771-OB
• 1771-OBN
• 1771-OQ16
• 1771-OZL
• 1771-OB16
• 1771-OBD
• 1771-OQ
• 1771-OYL
• 1771-OBB
115V AC Control Interface 3
(Standard L6 Interface) Without Encoder Feedback
(Option L9EC) With Encoder Feedback
Circuits used with the standard L6 interface or Option L9EC must be capable of operating with high = true logic.
In the low state, circuits must generate a voltage of no more than 30V AC. Leakage current must be less than
10 mA into a 6.5k ohm load.
In the high state, circuits must generate a voltage of 90-115V AC ±10% and source a current of approximately
20 mA for each input.
The L6C/L9EC option is compatible with the following Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
• 1771-OW
• 1771-OWN
• 1771-OA
• 1771-OAD (Contact Factory for Recommended Series/Rev. Level)
1 Rack size will impact enclosure size. Contact Allen-Bradley for possible enclosure size changes.
2 Actual hardware list will be determined at time of order entry.
3 For more information refer to the Standard Drives section.
78
Options
Human Interface Modules – NEMA Type 1 and 12 Door Mounted HIMS
Programming Panel
Control Panel with Analog Speed Pot
(Standard on all Human Interface modules)
(Option HA1C)
Analog Speed Pot
LCD Display
Jog Key
Control Panel with Digital Speed Pot
(Option HA2C and HJ2C)
Start Key
Up/ Down Arrow Keys Speed Indicator Jog Key
JOG
Direction LEDs
Escape Key Select Key Increment/Decrement Keys Enter Key
Reverse Key
Start Key
JOG
Stop Key
Direction LEDs
Reverse Key
Stop Key
NEMA Type 1 Drive Mounted HIMS
(Option HNSBC)
(Option HNSPC)
(Option HNS1C)
(Option HNS2C)
Blank – No Functionality
Program Only
Program/Control with Analog Speed Pot
Program/Control with Digital Speed Pot
NEMA Type 1 Door Mounted HIMS
(Option HABC)
(Option HAPC)
(Option HA1C)
(Option HA2C)
Blank – No Functionality
Program Only
Program/Control with Analog Speed Pot
Program/Control with Digital Speed Pot
NEMA Type 12 Door Mounted HIMS 1
(Option HJPC)
(Option HJ2C)
Program Only
Program/Control with Digital Speed Pot
Handheld
A separate handheld module may be connected to the drive. Maximum cable length is 33 feet (10 meters)
1 Not removable from the door as with NEMA Type 1 HIMS.
79
Options
Door-Mounted Operator Devices
Standard Door Layout
(Drive Enclosure)
Human
Interface
Module
D3
Option Set D2
Operator devices specified in the drive catalog number are supplied mounted
and wired on the enclosure door. The Standard Door Layouts shown indicate
the mounting locations of door mounted options or option groups.
Standard Door Layout
(Option Enclosure)
Elapsed
Time
Meter
Option Set D4
Option Set D1
D6
The operator device options listed below are logically grouped into sets.
Only one option code selection may be made from each set. Where possible,
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800E style operator devices will be supplied.
Description Code: PB = Pushbutton
SS = Selector Switch
PL = Pilot Light
POT = Potentiometer
MHPB = Mushroom Head Pushbutton
D5
Legend plates will be 30 mm x 50 mm, black with white lettering.
Option Set D1
(Option D11)
Hand/Off/
Auto
Auto/ Hand/Off/
Manual Auto
(Option D17)
(Option D15)
(Option D13)
Auto/
Manual
(Option D19)
Start
Jog
Start
PB
PB
PB
Stop
Stop
PB
(Option D12)
(Option D16)
(Option D14)
(Option D18)
PB
(Option D10)
Hand
Auto
Hand
Auto
Auto
Manual
Start
Jog
Start
A
A
A
A
A
A
PB
PB
PB
Hand/Off/
Auto
Auto/
Manual
Stop
Auto/
Manual
Stop
Auto/ Hand/Off/
Manual
Auto
Auto/
Manual
PB
Option Set D2
(Option D21)
Control
Pwr. On Run
W
W
Option Set D4
Option Set D3
(Option D22)
Control
Run
Pwr. On
(Option D31) (Option D32)
Standard with Any
Manual Bypass Option
(Option D41)
Drive
Bypass
Mode
Mode
A
W
W
PB
Drive
Fault
Motor
Fault
Drive
Fault
At
Speed
R
R
R
A
Standard with
Option -MH and -MH2
Standard with
Option -EH
Standard with Any
Auto Bypass Option
Motor
Heater
On
Enclosure
Space Heater
On
A.B.
Bypass Drive/Off/
Off/On Bypass
W
W
(Option D42)
Bypass
A.B.
Enabled Mode
Option Set D6
(Option D51)
(Option D52)
(Option D61)
Drive
Disable
Drive
Disable
Speed
MH
PB
MH
PB
(By Output Contactor
& Drive Enable)
(By Drive Enable)
1-Turn
1 Refer to Operator Device Function Guide in the Options section.
2 D22 must be used in conjunction with a Thermal Overload or Bypass Option.
3 D41 must be used with a Manual Bypass Option.
4 D42 must be used with an Auto Bypass Option.
5 D51 must be used in conjunction with an Output Contactor or Bypass Option.
6 D52 cannot be used with a Bypass Option.
80
Option Set D2
(Option D21)
(Option D22) 2
Control Power On PL, Run PL & Drive Fault PL
D21 Options plus Motor Fault PL
Option Set D3
(Option D31)
(Option D32)
At Speed PL
Forward/Reverse SS
Option Set D4
(Option D41) 3
(Option D42) 4
Drive Mode PL & Bypass Mode PL
Auto Bypass Enabled On PL & Bypass Mode PL
Option Set D5
(Option D51) 5
(Option D52) 6
Drive Disable (push-pull) MHPB
For Use with Drive Output Contactor & Drive Enable
For Use with Drive Enable Only
Option Set D6
(Option D61)
Speed POT, 1-Turn, NEMA Type 1/4/12
A
A
Option Set D5
(Option D12) 1
(Option D13) 1
(Option D14) 1
(Option D15) 1
(Option D16) 1
(Option D17)
(Option D18)
(Option D19)
Start PB, Stop PB, Jog PB, & Auto/Manual SS
Hand/Off/Auto (start/stop only) SS & Auto/
Manual (speed reference only) SS
D11 Options plus Hand PL & Auto PL
Hand/Off/Auto (start/stop/speed ref.) SS
D13 Option plus Hand PL & Auto PL
Auto/Manual (speed reference only) SS
D15 Option plus Auto PL & Manual PL
Start PB & Stop PB
Start PB, Stop PB & Auto/Manual SS
Start PB, Stop PB & Jog PB
A
Drive/Off/
Bypass
Fwd/Rev
Option Set D1
(Option D10)
(Option D11) 1
Option Set D9
(Option D91)
Convert the normally supplied A-B Bulletin 800E Style
Operator Devices to A-B Bulletin 800T Style
Options
Operator Device Function Guide
Option
D10
D11
&
D12
D13
&
D14
D15
&
D16
Device
Mode
Start/
Stop/
Jog
Auto/
Manual
Hand/
Off/
Auto
Auto/
Manual
Hand/
Off/
Auto
Auto/
Manual
Drive Start Control
Drive Stop Control
Drive Speed Reference
Pushbutton
or Selector
Switch
•
Pushbutton
or Selector
Switch
H.I.M. Options
With Control
Parameter #5 = Adapter 1
H.I.M.
With
Control
Remote
Contact
None
H.I.M.
With
Control
Remote
Contact
None
Defined
by Drive
Parameter 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
None
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 The function of the “Auto Mode” speed reference is dependent upon the programming of [Freq Select 2], parameter 6 in the drive. The use of an Analog Input Card is
recommended for any analog signal being fed to the drive. The function of the "Jog" mode is dependent upon the programming of [Jog Freq], parameter 24 in the drive.
Meter Options
Motor Run Time Meter
(Option ET)
Elapsed
Time Meter
This option provides a digital, non-resettable, door-mounted elapsed time meter. The meter is
electrically interlocked with the Drive Run relay and Bypass contactor (if supplied) to indicate actual
motor operating hours.
(Note: The standard internal drive elapsed time meter requires a HIM for viewing and is not operable
in the bypass mode.)
Line Metering System, Deluxe
(Option MQ2)
This option provides a Powermonitor II unit at the point of incoming power to the drive package.
Option includes a powermonitor and a single display. Current transformers are supplied as necessary.
Line Metering System, Basic
(Option MQ3)
This option provides a Powermonitor 3000 unit at the point of incoming power to the drive package.
Option includes a powermonitor and a single display. Current transformers are supplied as necessary.
Enclosure Options
Voltage Barriers
(Option EB)
Protective covers for line side of disconnect switch, door-mounted devices above 50V
(except for devices with finger safe terminals), and any foreign voltage sources.
Floor Stand
(Option EF1) 12" High
(Option EF2) 24" High
This option converts a wall-mounted enclosure to a floor-mounted enclosure and adds 12" or 24" to
the height of the enclosure. Special consideration should be given to the final height of the drive
package and corresponding operator devices.
Nameplate
(Option ET)
Pin or screw-mounted 6.25" x 2" door-mounted white lamacoid nameplate with black letters. The message
is defined by the customer at order entry – if no definition is supplied, the nameplate is shipped blank
for customer engraving.
Special Paint
(Option EP1) 1-color,
(Option EP2) 2-color, (Option EP3) 3-color
Special color(s) and/or type of paint. A manufacturer’s specification number and/or paint chip
will be required at order entry. (Note: A special primer specification is considered as one color.)
Space Heater, Remote Powered
(Option EH)
Provides (1) enclosure space heater to help prevent condensation inside the enclosure during periods
of drive inactivity. Space heater is energized whenever drive power is removed (requires a remote 120V
AC power source). Option includes a 180W fin strip type heater and a white Enclosure Space Heater
On pilot light mounted on the enclosure door. If remote power is not available, refer to option EH2.
Space Heater, Locally Powered
(Option EH2) Requires a control
power transformer option CF, CP or CT
Provides (1) enclosure space heater to help prevent condensation inside the enclosure during periods of
drive inactivity. Space heater is energized whenever the drive is not in Run status. If the space heater
is required to run when drive power is removed refer to option EH
Filtered Door Openings Only
(Option EC)
This option provides washable metal mesh filters on the outside of the enclosure door and over all
other vented openings. This option applies only to NEMA Type 1 drives.
Gasketed with Filtered Door Openings
(Option EG)
This option provides filtering as described in option EC. In addition all doors and wall panels will be
gasketed as necessary to prevent unfiltered air from entering the enclosure.
81
Options
Codes and Standards
Code/Standard
Action
CE
(European Conference Standard)
Consult the factory with requirements to meet the separate Low Voltage and/or EMC directives.
In most cases Configured Drives qualify for “Restricted Industrial” applications and will only require
meeting the Low Voltage directive.
IEEE519
(Harmonic Distortion Levels)
Provide a one-line plant power distribution drawing, and the associated harmonic specification to
the factory, for review. A software-based harmonic analysis will be performed to determine actual
harmonic mitigation requirements.
Q
®
CONT E
IN
IN
D
D
®
CONT E
Q
LI
LI
C
6
D5
STE 6L
D5
STE 6L
6
UL, C-UL (CSA)
Add a “-UL” option to the catalog string at no charge. This option provides UL panel recognition
from the factory.
Drawing and Test Options
Approval Drawings
Cat. No. 1301-APPDWG (Black & Whites)
Cat. No. 1301-APPRV (Velumes)
Manufacturing Drawings
Cat. No. 1301-MFDWG (Black & Whites)
Cat. No. 1301-MFRV (Velumes)
Final Drawings
Cat. No. 1301-FINDWG (Black & Whites)
Cat. No. 1301-FINRV (Velumes)
Cat. No. 1301-FINRM (Mylar)
Special Drawings and Reports
Cat. No. 1301-TESTR
Cat. No. 1301-CERMTR
Cat. No. 1301-CERXFR
Cat. No. 1301-CERLR
Cat. No. 1301-DISK
Cat. No. 1301-HARM1
Cat. No. 1301-HARM2
Cat. No. 1301-HARM3
Cat. No. 1301-WT
One set 11" x 17" electrical schematics and enclosure outlines – see sample drawings at the back of
this publication.
Further engineering and manufacture of drive held until drawings are returned approved by
the customer and any changes are approved by the manufacturer.
One set 11" x 17" electrical schematics and enclosure outlines – see sample drawings at the back of
this publication.
Information Only – Does not affect drive manufacturing. Availability is typically 2-3 weeks
prior to shipment of the drive(s).
One set 11" x 17" electrical schematics and enclosure outlines – see sample drawings at the back of
this publication.
Same drawings as shipped with the configured drive instruction book
Test Report, Configured Drive Only – Certifies that the configured drive has gone through test.
Certified Motor Dimension Drawing.
Certified Transformer Dimension Drawing.
Certified Line Reactor Dimension Drawing – Not available if mounted in the drive enclosure.
AutoCAD™ Disk copy of order schematics after order has shipped.
Basic Harmonic Analysis – Pre-order review of customer’s one-line power distribution diagram.
Complete Harmonic Analysis – Post order detailed Harmonic Spectrum Analysis followed up with
a written report.
Deluxe Harmonic Analysis – Post order site verification of actual harmonics, detailed Spectrum
Analysis and written report.
Witness Test – Customer viewing of A-B standard test procedures only. Additional tests and
documentation per customer requirements are also available.
Custom Drive Firmware Options
2 Second Power Loss
Fault Delay 1
(Option EN910)
Implementation of a 2 second power loss fault delay time. The timer is engaged when the
[Line Loss Fault] parameter is enabled and bus voltage drops below 85%, but above minimum
bus voltage.
MOP Reset On Stop
(Option EN935)
MOP frequency source is programmed to reset to zero following a stop.
60 Hertz Maximum Frequency
(Option EN945)
Maximum frequency of the drive is limited to 60 Hz.
1 This option should not be used with other configured drive options that do not have power fault delay capability.
82
Enclosures Specifications
Installation Guidelines
The information in the remaining sections of this document is very useful in making pre-installation decisions. Consideration should be given to enclosure
type (environment), enclosure size (mounting area available and mounting convention), panel layouts (customer wiring connection locations and extra
customer mounting area), terminal block descriptions (what connections land where) and catalog number definition (how do I order exactly what I need?).
Pay special attention to all footnotes and carefully read all warnings.
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. The
Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance
or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper
installation of this drive or associated equipment.
A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment exists if codes are ignored
during installation.
ATTENTION: The drive disable circuitry only shuts off the power transistors or opens an output
contactor. Both functions disable inherent or optional dynamic braking effects.
If hazards of injury due to contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of
liquid, gas or solids exist, it is the user’s responsibility to provide an additional
hardwired stop circuit in accordance with applicable codes and standards.
Enclosure Types
Configured Drives are packaged in NEMA Type 1, 4 or 12 enclosures with the heatsinks mounted out the back wherever possible. G frame drives and
certain special NEMA ratings will require internally-mounted heatsinks. Each enclosure type lends itself to a particular type of protection and environment.
The enclosures detailed below do not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation, corrosion or contamination which may occur within the
enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings. Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions, and satisfy
themselves that the equipment is properly protected. Other enclosure types are available by custom quotation. For further information on criteria associated
with NEMA enclosure ratings, refer to NEMA Standards Publication NO. 250-1991.
IP20 NEMA Type 1
Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against
contact with the enclosed equipment in locations where unusual service conditions do not exist. The
enclosures are designed to meet the rod entry and rust resistance design tests. Slotted openings in the
enclosure sides or door(s) allow for free exchange of inside and outside air.
IP54 NEMA Type 12
Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust,
falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids. They are designed to meet drip, dust and rust resistance
tests. There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow free exchange of inside and
outside air. Closed loop auxiliary cooling may be required for higher HP ratings. Specifications calling
for NEMA-12 ventilated enclosures should be reviewed with the factory.
IP65 NEMA Type 4
Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection
against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose directed water, and to be undamaged by
the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet hose-down, dust, external icing and
rust resistance design tests. Doors and openings will be gasket sealed. There are no ventilation
openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air. Closed loop auxiliary
cooling may be required for higher HP ratings.
83
Enclosures Specifications
Material Specifications
A
C
B
A Back Plate Chassis for Heatsink
Frame
A1-C
A
Material
12 GA. Sheet Steel
Finish
Finish Spec.
A-B Standard Light Gray Paint
(Low Gloss)
(NEMA Type 1)
40001-109-08
ASA 61 GRAY
A-B Standard Light Gray Paint
(Powder Coat Low Gloss)
(NEMA Type 4/12)
40001-108-04
D-E
12 GA. Sheet Steel
A-B Standard Gray Paint
(NEMA Type 1/12)
40001-109-02
ASA 49 GRAY
F-G
12 GA. Sheet Steel
A-B Standard Gray Paint
(NEMA Type 1/12)
40001-109-02
ASA 49 GRAY
Frame
Material
Finish
Finish Spec.
A-G
Aluminum
Bronze Chromate
40001-058
B Heatsink
B
C Enclosure
Frame
Material
Finish
Finish Spec.
A1-C
14 GA. Sheet Steel
A-B Standard Light Gray Paint
(NEMA Type 1)
40001-109-08
ANSI 49 GRAY
(NEMA Type 4/12)
40001-108-04
C
D-G
84
12 GA. Sheet Steel
A-B Standard Light Gray Paint
(NEMA Type 1/12)
40001-109-02
ASA 49 GRAY
Enclosures Specifications
Mounting and Spacing Requirements
➮
Approved Mounting Methods for Wall Mounting Enclosures
CEILING
152.4 mm
(6.0 In.)
ΙΙ
➮
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
➮
Approved Mounting Method
Not Acceptable
NOT ACCEPTABLE
Approved Mounting Methods
for Floor Mounting Enclosures
• All Floor Mounting Style Enclosures can be
mounted tight against the back wall.
• NEMA Type 1 Floor Mounting Style (Force
ventilated as standard) may be mounted side by
side with zero clearance.
• NEMA Type 12 Floor Mounting Style Enclosures
will require six inch clearance on the sides.
101.6 mm
(4.0 in.)
NOT ACCEPTABLE 1
➮
➮
Approved Mounting Method
Approved Mounting Method
➮
➮
152.4 mm
(6.0 In.)
152.4 mm
(6.0 In.)
FLOOR
1 Some horizontal mounting conventions are acceptable
provided the application and packaging is reviewed with
Allen-Bradley.
Input Conditioning
In general, the 1336 PLUS II drive is suitable for direct connection to a correct voltage AC line that has a minimum impedance of 1% (3% for
0.37-22 kW/0.5-30 HP drives) relative to the rated drive input kVA. If the line has a lower impedance, a line reactor or isolation transformer
must be added before the drive to increase line impedance. If the line impedance is too low, transient voltage spikes or interruptions can
create excessive current spikes that will cause nuisance input fuse blowing and may cause damage to the drive power structure.
The basic rules for determining if a line reactor or isolation type transformer is required are as follows:
1. If the AC input power system does not have a neutral or one phase referenced to ground (Refer to Ungrounded Distribution Systems),
an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended. If the line-to-ground voltages on any
phase can exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage, an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded, is
always required.
2. If the AC line supplying the drive has power factor correction capacitors that are switched in and out, an isolation transformer or 5%
reactors are recommended between the capacitors and drive. If the capacitors are permanently connected and not switched, the general
rules for impedance mismatch above apply.
3. If the AC line frequently experiences transient power interruptions or significant voltage spikes, an isolation transformer or 5% reactors
are recommended.
Line reactors and isolation transformers can be ordered as loose items or installed in the drive enclosure.
85
Dimensions
IP20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions For A-C Frame Drives
12.7
(0.50)
A
A1
A2
12.5
(0.49)
Mounting Holes (2)
(see detail)
375.4
(14.78) 335.0
203.0 (13.19)
(7.99)
40.4
(1.59)
132.0
(5.20)
Lifting Holes (2)
– Frames A4, B & C Only –
ON
O
F
F
FRONT
SIDE
B2
BYPASS MODE
DRIVE MODE
AUTO BYPASS
OFF
ON
OFF
DRIVE BYPASS
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
ON
Additional Mounting Holes
Not Present When
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE Is Required
O
F
F
POWER ON
DRIVE RUN
DRIVE FAULT
MOTOR FAULT
AUTO MANUAL
DRIVE FAULT
ATI
TIL
VEN
AT SPEED
HAND
AUTO
HAND
OFF
AUTO
ON
B1
D1 D
SLO
EMERGENCY
STOP
TS
II
Mounting Slots (2)
(see detail)
7.9 (0.31)
7.1 (0.28)
135° Door Radius
12.7 (0.50)
12.7 (0.50)
14.3 (0.56)
Mounting Slots
Mounting Holes
Option Mounting Location
CONDUIT ACCESS
(Top or Bottom)
BOTTOM
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
All Option Codes Not Listed Below
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE
Option Codes BA, BM, CC, D41, D42, DT, JS
CONSULT
FACTORY
Option Codes BC, BD, BP, BS, CM, JL, LQ,
LR, MP12A, MP12N, MP18A, MP18N, MQ2, MQ3
Approximate Shipping Weights
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Three-Phase Ratings
Frame
A1-A3
230V
460V
0.37-3.7 kW 0.37-3.7 kW
0.5-5 HP
0.5-5 HP
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Drive/Option and
Drive/Option
Enclosure Only Expanded Option
Enclosures
575V
A
A1
A2
B1
B2
D
D1
—
—
655.0
(25.79)
630.0
(24.80)
600.0
(23.62)
500.0
(19.69)
1000.0
(39.37)
475.0
(18.70)
975.0
(38.39)
35
(75)
65
(140)
A4 or B
5.5-11 kW
7.5-15 HP
5.5-22 kW
7.5-30 HP
0.75-15 kW
1-20 HP
655.0
(25.79)
630.0
(24.80)
600.0
(23.62)
650.0
(25.59)
1150.0
(45.28)
625.0
(24.61)
1125.0
(44.29)
60
(130)
110
(243)
C
15-22 kW
20-30 HP
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
19-45 kW
25-60 HP
855.0
(33.66)
830.0
(32.68)
800.0
(31.50)
900.0
(35.43)
1550.0
(61.02)
875.0
(34.45)
1525.0
(60.04)
95
(210)
145
(320)
86
Dimensions
IP54 (NEMA Type 12) and IP 65 (NEMA TYPE 4) Dimensions For A-C Frame Drives
12.70
(0.50)
A
A1
A2
548.4
(21.59)
12.5
(0.49)
Mounting Holes (2)
(see detail)
40.4
(1.59)
ON
B2
BYPASS MODE
OFF
DRIVE BYPASS
AUTO BYPASS
OFF
ON
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
Additional Mounting Holes
Not Present When
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE Is Required
FRONT
AT SPEED
POWER ON
DRIVE FAULT
DRIVE RUN
SIDE
NOTE: IP 65 (NEMA Type 4) will have
waterproof gasketing system and
drive/option mounting chassis.
MOTOR FAULT
D1 D
B1
HAND
AUTO
HAND
OFF
AUTO MANUAL
AUTO
C2
Lifting Holes (2)
– Frames A4, B & C Only –
O
F
F
DRIVE MODE
508.0
(20.00)
C1
DRIVE FAULT
EMERGENCY
STOP
II
Mounting Slots (2)
(see detail)
7.9 (0.31)
7.1 (0.28)
135° Door Radius
12.7 (0.50)
12.7 (0.50)
14.3 (0.56)
Mounting Slots
Mounting Holes
Option Mounting Location
CONDUIT ACCESS
(Top or Bottom)
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
All Option Codes Not Listed Below
EXPANDED OPTION Option Codes BA, BM, CC, D41, D42, DT, JS
ENCLOSURE
BOTTOM
Option Codes BC, BD, BP, BS, CM, JL, LQ, LR, MP12A,
MP12N, MP18A, MP18N, MQ2, MQ3
CONSULT
FACTORY
Approximate Shipping Weights
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Three-Phase Ratings
Frame
A1-A3
230V
460V
0.37-3.7 kW 0.37-3.7 kW
0.5-5 HP
0.5-5 HP
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Drive/Option and
Drive/Option
Enclosure Only Expanded Option
Enclosures
575V
A
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
D
D1
—
—
664.7
(26.17)
639.8
(25.19)
609.6
(24.00)
685.8
(27.00)
1193.8
(47.00)
407.9
(16.06)
100.1
(3.94)
660.9
(26.02)
1168.9
(46.02)
50
(110)
79
(175)
A4 or B
5.5-11 kW
7.5-15 HP
5.5-22 kW
7.5-30 HP
0.75-15 kW
1-20 HP
918.7
(36.17)
893.8
(35.19)
863.6
(34.00)
939.8
(37.00)
1549.4
(61.00)
375.9
(14.80)
132.0
(5.20)
914.9
(36.02)
1524.5
(60.02)
77
(170)
129
(285)
C
15-22 kW
20-30 HP
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
19-45 kW
25-60 HP
918.7
(36.17)
893.8
(35.19)
863.6
(34.00)
1320.8
(52.0)
1930.4
(76.0)
375.9
(14.80)
132.0
(5.20)
1295.9
(51.02)
1905.5
(75.02)
116
(255)
166
(365)
87
Dimensions
IP20 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) For D-E Frame Drives
A3 IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
A2 IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
A1 IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
A
235.0
(9.25)
C
101.6
(4.00)
508.0
(20.00)
C1
381.0
(15.00)
139.7
(5.50)
C2
1
2
AT SPEED
HAND
Allow
152.4
(6.00)
for
Air
Flow
POWER ON
AUTO
DRIVE RUN
HAND
OFF
AUTO
DRIVE FAULT
MOTOR FAULT
AUTO MANUAL
DRIVE FAULT
EMERGENCY
STOP
II
2286.0
(90.00)
3
Option Mounting Location
EXPANDED OPTION
ENCLOSURE
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
SIDE
FRONT
2
1
Removable Lifting Angle
3
Air Conditioner — IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Only
2
Vented Areas — IP20 (NEMA Type 1) Only
4
Heatsink (Fan Accessible from Inside of Enclosure)
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
All Option Codes Not
Listed Below
EXPANDED
OPTION
ENCLOSURE
Option Codes BA, BM,
CC, D41, D42, DT
and JS
CONSULT
FACTORY
Option Codes BC, BD,
BP, BS, CM, JL, LQ,
LR, LT, LW, MP12A,
MP12N, MP18A, MP18N,
MQ2 and MQ3
4
254.0
(10.00)
D
50.8
(2.00)
3
217.4
(8.56)
CONDUIT ACCESS
1
CONDUIT ACCESS
293.6
(11.56)
3
BOT TOM
82.0
(3.20)
279.4
(11.00)
CONDUIT ACCESS
CONDUIT ACCESS
TOP
D1
15.87 (0.625) Dia. Mounting Holes (4)
30.0
(1.14)
450.1
(17.72)
D2
50.8
(2.00)
30.0
(1.14)
406.4
(16.00)
D3
50.8
(2.00)
Approximate Shipping Weights
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Three-Phase Ratings
Frame
230V
D
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
(120-180 A)
56-93 kW
75-125 HP
(85-138 A)
E
56-93 kW 112-187 kW 149-187 kW 112-149 kW
75-125 HP 150-250 HP 200-250 HP 150-300 HP
(240-325 A) (199-325 A) (240-325 A) (158-300 A)
88
460V-CT 460V-VT
45-112 kW
60-150 HP
(85-180 A)
56-112 kW
75-150 HP
(96-180 A)
Drive/Option
Enclosure Only
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
575V
IP20
Drive/Option & Expanded
Option Enclosures
IP 54
IP 20
IP54
A2
A3
C
C1
635.0 1143.0
(25.00) (45.00)
1378.0
(54.25)
1530.4
(60.25)
607.1
(25.75)
466.1
(20.21)
85.1 317.5
(5.21) (12.50)
128.0 576.6 533.4
(6.90) (22.70) (21.00)
386
(850)
436
(960)
522
(1150)
572
(1260)
889.0 1397.0
(35.00) (55.00)
1632.0
(64.25)
1784.4
(70.25)
654.1
(25.75)
513.3
(20.21)
132.3 444.5
(5.21) (17.50)
175.3 830.6 787.4
(6.90) (32.70) (31.00)
408
(900)
458
(1010)
544
(1200)
594
(1310)
A
A1
C2
D
D1
D2
D3
(NEMA Type 1) (NEMA Type 12)
(NEMA Type 1) (NEMA Type 12)
Dimensions
IP20 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Dimensions for F Frame Drives without Bypass
A IP 54 (NEMA Type 12, 350-450 HP)
A1 IP 54 (NEMA Type 12, 350-450 HP)
1270.0 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1)
(50.00) IP 54 (NEMA Type 12, 250-300 HP)
A2
101.6
(4.00)
C1
381.0
(15.0)
254.0
(10.0)
1
2
AT SPEED
HAND
POWER ON
AUTO
DRIVE FAULT
DRIVE RUN
HAND
OFF
AUTO MANUAL
AUTO
MOTOR FAULT
DRIVE FAULT
EMERGENCY
STOP
II
2286.0
(90.00)
DANGER
REMOTE SOURCE(S) OF POWER
DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER
BEFORE OPENING DOOR.
DANGER
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD FROM
ENERGY STORAGE CAPACITORS.
VERIFY LOW VOLTAGE DISCHARGE
BEFORE SERVICING.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Allow
152.4
(6.00)
for
Air
Flow
3
DRIVE OPTION
ENCLOSURE
(SUPPLIED AS
STANDARD) 5
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
FRONT
SIDE
2
635.0
(25.00)
508.0
(20.00)
762.0
(30.00)
50.8
(2.00)
406.4
(16.00)
1
CONDUIT
ACCESS
Option Mounting Location
50.8
(2.00)
279.4
(11.00)
Consult Factory JL, JS, LQ, LT, LR, LW, MP12N, MP18A, MP12A, MP18N,
Option List
MQ2, MQ3
1 Removable Lifting Angle
2 Vented Areas — IP20 (NEMA Type 1) Only
3 Air Conditioner — IP54 (NEMA Type 12) 350-450 HP Only
4 350 HP Dimension is actually 139.7 (5.50)
5 Special Smaller Enclosure
TOP
2.00
26.00
4.00
16.00
CONDUIT
ACCESS
11.56
CONDUIT
ACCESS
7.50
BOTTOM
1.69
A single 762 mm (30 In.) wide enclosure may be used if the option list
requirements below are met. Consult factory for custom quotation in all cases.
Any combination of:
CM, D10-D91, EC, EP, ET, GD1C, GD2C, GM1C, GM2C, GM5C, JC, JF, JM, JR,
JT, L4C, L5C, L4EC, L5EC, L6EC, LA–C, ME, all HIMs and a max. of (1) CF, EB
EH, N3, N4C, N4T, N5C, N5T or N9.
3.50
0.625 DIA—6 MTG HOLES
15.00
CB, CF, CP, CT, DS, D1– –, D2 –, D3 –, D5 –, E – –, D61,
D91, GM–C, GD–C, GMS–C, HA – –, HJ – –, HN – –, JC,
JF, JM, JR, JT, K –, L – –, L – – –, M –, M– –, N3 –, N – –, UL
Mountable
Option List
25.00
Approximate Shipping Weights
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
F
Three-Phase Ratings
460V-CT
575V
460V-VT
187-224 kW
250-300 HP
(325-360 A)
224 kW
300 HP
(360 A)
—
—
—
261-336 kW
350-450 HP
(425-525 A)
261-336 kW
350-450 HP
(425-525 A)
261-298 kW
350-400 HP
(425-475 A)
Drive and Drive Option Enclosures
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
A
A1
A2
139.7
(5.50)
NOT APPLICABLE –
NO AIR CONDITIONER
REQUIRED
1657.4
(65.25)
1422.4
(56.0)
C1
234.9
(9.25)
215.9
(8.50)
4
4
624
(1375)
624
(1375)
624
(1375)
805
(1775)
89
Dimensions
IP20 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Dimensions for F Frame Drives with Bypass
A IP 54 (NEMA Type 12, 350-450 HP)
A1 IP 54 (NEMA Type 12, 350-450 HP)
2032.0 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1)
(80.00) IP 54 (NEMA Type 12, 250-300 HP)
A2
101.6
(4.00)
C1
381.0
(15.0)
254.0
(10.0)
1
2
AT SPEED
HAND
POWER ON
AUTO
DRIVE FAULT
DRIVE RUN
HAND
OFF
AUTO MANUAL
AUTO
MOTOR FAULT
DRIVE FAULT
EMERGENCY
STOP
II
2286.0
(90.00)
DANGER
REMOTE SOURCE(S) OF POWER
DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER
BEFORE OPENING DOOR.
DANGER
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD FROM
ENERGY STORAGE CAPACITORS.
VERIFY LOW VOLTAGE DISCHARGE
BEFORE SERVICING.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
DRIVE/OPTION
ENCLOSURE
Allow
152.4
(6.00)
for
Air
Flow
DRIVE OPTION
ENCLOSURE
BYPASS OPTION
ENCLOSURE
3
2
FRONT
762.0
(30.00)
508.0
(20.00)
SIDE
635.0
(25.00)
762.0
(30.00)
2.00
2.00
26.00
16.00
4.00
Option Mounting Location
1
CONDUIT
ACCESS
CONDUIT
ACCESS
Mountable
Option List
7.50
TOP
26.00
26.00
4.00
16.00
Consult Factory Option Codes From Previous
Option List
Page Plus BC, BD, BP, BS, MP12A,
MP12N, MP18A, MP18N, MQ2, MQ3
2.00
4.00
1
CONDUIT
ACCESS
11.56
CONDUIT
ACCESS
CONDUIT
ACCESS
2
7.50
3
4
BOTTOM
1.69
Option Codes From Previous
Page Plus BA, BM, CC, D41,
D42, DT, FM
Removable Lifting Angle
Vented Areas — IP20 (NEMA Type 1) Only
Air Conditioner — IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
350-450 HP Only
350 HP Dimension is actually 139.7 (5.50)
3.50
0.625 DIA—6 MTG HOLES
15.00
25.00
25.00
Three-Phase Ratings
Drive, Drive Option and
Bypass Option Enclosures
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Frame
460V-CT
460V-VT
575V
F
187-224 kW
250-300 HP
(325-360 A)
224 kW
300 HP
(360 A)
—
—
—
261-336 kW
350-450 HP
(425-525 A)
261-336 kW
350-450 HP
(425-525 A)
261-298 kW
350-400 HP
(425-475 A)
90
Approximate Shipping Weights
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
A
A1
A2
NOT APPLICABLE –
NO AIR CONDITIONER
REQUIRED
2419.4
(95.25)
2267.0
(89.25)
C1
139.7
(5.50)
235.0
(9.25)
215.9
(8.50)
4
4
1066
(2350)
1066
(2350)
1066
(2350)
1247
(2750)
Dimensions
IP20 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Dimensions for G Frame Drives without Bypass
A IP 54 (NEMA Type 12)
101.6
(4.00)
A1 IP 54 (NEMA Type 12)
1270.0 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1)
(50.00)
A2
A2
1
1
C1
2
AT SPEED
POWER ON
HAND
AUTO
DRIVE FAULT
DRIVE RUN
HAND
OFF
AUTO MANUAL
AUTO
MOTOR FAULT
DRIVE FAULT
2286.0
(90.00)
EMERGENCY
STOP
II
DANGER
REMOTE SOURCE(S) OF POWER
DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER
BEFORE OPENING DOOR.
DANGER
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD FROM
ENERGY STORAGE CAPACITORS.
VERIFY LOW VOLTAGE DISCHARGE
BEFORE SERVICING.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Allow
152.4
(6.00)
for
Air
Flow
3
DRIVE ENCLOSURE
3
DRIVE OPTION
ENCLOSURE
FRONT
2
Allow
152.4
(6.00)
for
Air
Flow
3
SIDE
508.0
(20.00)
762.0
(30.00)
635.0
(25.00)
50.8
(2.00)
406.4
(16.00)
50.8
(2.00)
Option Mounting Location
1
3
3
TOP
CB, CF, CP, CT, DEC, DS, D1 –, D2 –, D3 –, D5 –,E–, D61, D91,
GM –C, GD –C, GMS –C, HA – –, HJ – –, HN – –, ITC, JC, JF, JM,
JR, JT, K –, L – –, L – – –, M –, M – –, N3, N – –, UL
Mountable
Option List
444.5
(17.50)
CONDUIT ACCESS
Consult Factory JA, JL, JS, LQ, LT, LR, LW, MP12A, MP12N, MP18A, MP18N,
Option List
MQ2, MQ3
431.8
(17.00)
547.6
(21.56)
3
CONDUIT ACCESS
254.0
(10.00)
298.5
(11.75)
Special Smaller Enclosure
29.0
(1.14)
A single 762 mm (30 In.) wide enclosure may be used if the option list
requirements below are met. Consult factory for custom quotation in all cases.
Any combination of:
CM, D10-D91, EC, EP, ET, GD1C, GD2C, GM1C, GM2C, GM5C, JC, JF, JM, JR,
JT, L4C, L5C, L4EC, L5EC, L6EC, LA–C, all HIMs and a max. of (1) CF, EB,
EH, N2, N3, N4C, N4T, N5C, N5T or N9.
CONDUIT ACCESS
3
444.5
(17.50)
BOTTOM
1
381.0
(15.00)
42.9
(1.69)
635.0
(25.00)
15.87 (0.625) Dia.
Mounting Holes (4)
88.9
(3.50)
2
3
Removable Lifting Angle
Vented Areas — IP20 (NEMA Type 1) Only
Air Conditioner — IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Only
Approximate Shipping Weights
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
460V-CT
Three-Phase Ratings
460V-VT
575V
A
A1
A2
C1
G
224-261 kW
300-350 HP
(360-425 A)
224-261 kW
300-350 HP
(360-425 A)
224-261 kW
300-350 HP
(360-425 A)
2103.1
(82.80)
1798.3
(70.80)
264.2
(10.40)
139.7
(5.50)
624
(1375)
805
(1775)
298-448 kW
400-600 HP
(475-670 A)
298-448 kW
400-600 HP
(475-670 A)
298-448 kW
400-600 HP
(400-600 A)
2230.1
(87.80)
1925.3
(75.8)
327.7
(12.9)
215.9
(8.50)
624
(1375)
832
(1885)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Drive and Drive Option Enclosures
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
91
Dimensions
IP20 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Dimensions for G Frame Drives with Bypass
A IP 54 (NEMA Type 12)
101.6
(4.00)
A1 IP 54 (NEMA Type 12)
2032.0 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1)
(80.00)
A2
A2
1
1
C1
2
AT SPEED
HAND
POWER ON
AUTO
DRIVE FAULT
DRIVE RUN
HAND
OFF
AUTO
AUTO MANUAL
MOTOR FAULT
DRIVE FAULT
2286.0
(90.00)
EMERGENCY
STOP
DANGER
REMOTE SOURCE(S) OF POWER
DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER
BEFORE OPENING DOOR.
DANGER
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD FROM
ENERGY STORAGE CAPACITORS.
VERIFY LOW VOLTAGE DISCHARGE
BEFORE SERVICING.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
DRIVE ENCLOSURE
Allow
152.4
(6.00)
for
Air
Flow
DRIVE OPTION
ENCLOSURE
BYPASS OPTION
ENCLOSURE
Allow
152.4
(6.00)
for
Air
Flow
3
3
2
FRONT
762.0
(30.00)
508.0
(20.00)
3
SIDE
635.0
(25.00)
762.0
(30.00)
101.6
(4.00)
406.4
(16.00)
50.8
50.8 (2.00)
(2.00)
660.4
(26.00)
1
CONDUIT ACCESS
CONDUIT ACCESS
3
3
TOP
29.0
431.8 (1.14)
(17.00)
101.6
(4.00)
406.4
(16.00)
660.4
(26.00)
Option Mounting Location
444.5
(17.50)
50.8
(2.00)
254.0
(10.00)
298.5
(11.75)
3
CONDUIT ACCESS
3
BOTTOM
635.0
(25.00)
381.0
(15.00)
42.9
(1.69)
Three-Phase Ratings
Consult Factory
Option List
Option Codes From Previous
Page Plus BC, BD, BP, BS, MP12A,
MP12N, MP18A, MP18N, MQ2, MQ3
2
CONDUIT ACCESS
CONDUIT ACCESS
Option Codes From Previous
Page Plus BA, BM, CC, D41,
D42, DT, FM
1
15.87 (0.625) Dia. — Mounting Holes (6)
547.6
(21.56)
Mountable
Option List
635.0
(25.00)
444.5
(17.50)
3
88.9
(3.50)
Removable Lifting Angle
Vented Areas — IP20 (NEMA Type 1) Only
Air Conditioner — IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Only
Approximate Shipping Weights
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Drive, Drive Option and
Bypass Option Enclosures
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
Frame
460V-CT
460V-VT
575V
A
A1
A2
C1
G
224-261 kW
300-350 HP
(360-425 A)
224-261 kW
300-350 HP
(360-425 A)
224-261 kW
300-350 HP
(360-425 A)
2865.1
(112.80)
2560.3
(100.80)
264.2
(10.40)
139.7
(5.50)
1066
(2350)
1247
(2750)
298-448 kW
400-600 HP
(475-670 A)
298-448 kW
400-600 HP
(475-670 A)
298-448 kW
400-600 HP
(400-600 A)
2992.1
(117.80)
2687.3
(105.80)
327.7
(12.90)
215.9
(8.50)
1066
(2350)
1275
(2810)
92
Panel Layouts
The panel layouts shown on the following pages are typical for the drive ratings listed. The layouts include a worst case Pre-Engineered
(P) Options Only scenario (See Option List on the next page). The dimension grid can be used to determine available panel space by taking
into account which of the components shown will actually be included in an individual drive package.
A1-A3 Frame Drives – 230/460V 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP)
IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
WITH OPTION BAY
1000
(39.37)
914
(36.00)
14
10
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
762
(30.00)
8
7
13
12
11
610
(24.00)
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
9
457
(18.00)
500
(19.69)
457
(18.00)
1
14
4
305
(12.00)
4
15
14
4
6
6
15
0
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
2
152
(6.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
3
5
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
305
(12.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
2
152
(6.00)
1
4
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
3
5
or
9
7
0
0
152
(6.00)
457
(18.00)
305
(12.00)
0
600
(23.62)
457
(18.00)
305
(12.00)
152
(6.00)
600
(23.62)
IP54 (NEMA Type 12) – IP65 (NEMA Type 4)
Consult Allen-Bradley when adding additional heat producing components to existing NEMA Type 4 or 12 rated drives.
WITH OPTION BAY
1194
(47.00)
1067
(42.00)
12
14
13
914
(36.00)
7
10
8
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
9
11
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
762
(30.00)
610
(24.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
14
610
(24.00)
1
TERMINAL
BLOCK
457
(18.00)
(STD.)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
305
(12.00)
1
2
2
457
(18.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
(STD.)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
305
(12.00)
4
6
3
6
7
4
152
(6.00)
5
or
3
4
4
152
(6.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
5
9
15
15
0
0
0
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
610 662
(24.00)(26.05)
0
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
610 662
(24.00)(26.05)
1
DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
6
DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR
11
BYPASS MOTOR FUSES
2
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
7
DRIVE OUTPUT CONTACTOR
12
AUTO BYPASS LOGIC
3
RELAY LOGIC (VARIES)
8
BYPASS CONTACTOR
13
MOTOR GROUND TERMINAL
4
COMMUNICATION OPTION CARD (DRIVE OR PANEL MOUNTED)
9
OVERLOAD RELAY
14
LINE GROUND TERMINAL
5
INPUT ISOLATOR
10
BYPASS CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
15
SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL
93
Panel Layouts
Pre-engineered (P) options include the following catalog numbers
-LA2C
-LA3C
-LA4C
-LA5C
-LA6C
-LA7C
-L9EC
-ME
-MK
-MT
-N3
-HNSBC
-HNSPC
-HNS1C
-HNS2C
-JC
-JF
-JM
-JR
-JT
-KD
-KM
-LA1C
-GM5C
-GM6C
-GMS1C
-GMS2C
-GMS5C
-GMS6C
-HABC
-HAPC
-HA1C
-HA2C
-HJPC
-HJ2C
-D31
-D32
-D41
-D42
-D51
-D52
-D61
-FM
-GD1C
-GD2C
-GM1C
-GM2C
-D10
-D11
-D12
-D13
-D14
-D15
-D16
-D17
-D18
-D19
-D21
-D22
-AA
-AF
-AJ
-BA
-BM
-CB
-CC
-CF
-CP
-CT
-DS
-DT
A4 Frame Drives – 460V 5.5-15 kW (7.5-20 HP)
IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
WITH OPTION BAY
1000
(39.37)
1067
(42.00)
14
10
916
(36.00)
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
7
8
12
11
13
9
762
(30.00)
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
650
(25.59)
610
(24.00)
610
(24.00)
1
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
1
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
457
(18.00)
14
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
457
(18.00)
14
4
4
6
6
305
(12.00)
or
305
(12.00)
2
152
(6.00)
152
(6.00)
15
4
5
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
3
15
0
5
4
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
3
9
0
0
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
600
(23.62)
152
(6.00)
0
305
(12.00)
5
INPUT ISOLATOR
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
6
DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR
RELAY LOGIC (VARIES)
7
DRIVE OUTPUT CONTACTOR
COMMUNICATION OPTION CARD (DRIVE OR PANEL MOUNTED)
8
1
DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
2
3
4
9
94
2
7
BYPASS CONTACTOR
-
15
NEXT PAGE
457
(18.00)
600
(23.62)
Panel Layouts
B1-B2 Frame Drives – 230V 5.5-11 kW (7.5-15 HP) – 460V 11-22 kW (15-30 HP)
IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
WITH OPTION BAY
1000
(39.37)
1067
(42.00)
14
10
916
(36.00)
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
7
8
12
11
762
(30.00)
13
610
(24.00)
9
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
650
(25.59)
610
(24.00)
1
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
14
1
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
14
457
(18.00)
457
(18.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
4
305
(12.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
4
305
(12.00)
2
6
2
6
or
7
152
(6.00)
15
4
5
152
(6.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
3
0
15
4
5
9
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
3
0
0
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
600
(23.62)
0
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
600
(23.62)
A4, B1 And B2 Frame Drives – 230V 5.5-11 kW (7.5-15 HP) – 460V 5.5-22 kW (7.5-30 HP) – 575V .75-15 kW (1-20 HP)
IP54 (NEMA Type 12) – IP65 (NEMA Type 4)
Consult Allen-Bradley when adding additional heat producing components to existing NEMA Type 12 rated drives.
WITH OPTION BAY
1549
(61.00)
1522
(59.93)
14
1372
(54.00)
10
12
1219
(48.00)
7
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
8
13
11
9
1067
(42.00)
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
916
(36.06)
916
(36.06)
7622
(30.00)
1
610
(24.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
457
(18.00)
14
7622
(30.00)
1
610
(24.00)
457
(18.00)
15
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
6
15
or
6
2
305
(12.00)
152
(6.00)
16
5
4
3
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
2
305
(12.00)
7
9
152
(6.00)
16
5
4
3
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
0
0
0
152 305
457 610
762 914
(6.00) (12.00) (18.00) (24.00) (30.00) (36.00)
1
-
9
0
12
AUTO BYPASS LOGIC
OVERLOAD RELAY
13
MOTOR GROUND TERMINAL
10
BYPASS CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
14
LINE GROUND TERMINAL
11
BYPASS MOTOR FUSES
15
SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL
8
PREVIOUS PAGE
152 305
457 610 76236 914
(6.00) (12.00) (18.00) (24.00) (30.00) (36.00)
95
Panel Layouts
C Frame Drives – 230V 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) – 460V 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) – 575V 18.5-45 kW (25-60 HP)
IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
WITH OPTION BAY
1550
(61.02)
14
1372
(54.00)
12
7
1000
(48.00)
13
10
8
9
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
1000
(42.00)
11
9
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
914
(36.00)
900
(35.43)
762
(30.00)
762
(30.00)
1
14
1
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
610
(24.00)
610
(24.00)
1336 PLUS DRIVE
(STD.)
457
(18.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
4
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
4
305
(12.00)
2
or
7
2
9
152
(6.00)
15
4
5
3
152
(6.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
0
0
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
610
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
800
(31.50)
15
5
4
3
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
0
152
(6.00)
0
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
1
DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
5
INPUT ISOLATOR
2
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
6
DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR
3
RELAY LOGIC (VARIES)
7
DRIVE OUTPUT CONTACTOR
4
COMMUNICATION OPTION CARD (DRIVE OR PANEL MOUNTED)
8
9
96
6
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
6
BYPASS CONTACTOR
-
15
NEXT PAGE
610
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
800
(31.50)
Panel Layouts
C Frame Drives – 230V 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) – 460V 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) – 575V 18.5-45 kW (25-60 HP)
IP54 (NEMA Type 12) – IP65 (NEMA Type 4)
Consult Allen-Bradley when adding additional heat producing components to existing NEMA Type 4 or 12 rated drives.
WITH OPTION BAY
1930
(76.00)
1829
(72.00)
14
7
10
12
8
1676
(66.00)
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
1524
(60.00)
11
9
13
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
1372
(54.00)
1194
(48.00)
1194
(48.00)
1
14
1067
(42.00)
1067
(42.00)
914
(36.00)
914
(36.00)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
7622
(30.00)
610
(24.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
7622
(30.00)
610
(24.00)
4
1
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
4
6
or
457
(18.00)
2
457
(18.00)
6
305
(12.00)
2
7
305
(12.00)
9
152
(6.00)
15
5
3
4
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
152
(6.00)
0
15
5
4
3
TERMINAL
BLOCK (STD.)
0
0
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
457
(18.00)
610
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
0
918
(36.15)
152
(6.00)
305
(12.00)
1
-
12
AUTO BYPASS LOGIC
9
OVERLOAD RELAY
13
MOTOR GROUND TERMINAL
10
BYPASS CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
14
LINE GROUND TERMINAL
11
BYPASS MOTOR FUSES
15
SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL
8
PREVIOUS PAGE
457
(18.00)
610
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
918
(36.15)
97
Panel Layouts
D Frame Drives – 230V 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) – 460V 45-112 kW (60-150 HP @ 180A) – 575V 56-93 kW (75-125 HP)
IP20 or IP54 (NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12)
Consult Allen-Bradley when adding additional heat producing components to existing NEMA Type 12 rated drives.
WITH OPTION BAY
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
2286
(90.00)
2286
(90.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
14
1981.2
(78.00)
1981.2
(78.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1
1828.8
(72.00)
14
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1
10
1828.8
(72.00)
(STD.)
1676.4
(66.00)
(STD.)
1676.4
(66.00)
3
1524
(60.00)
4
1371.6
(54.00)
15
3
1524
(60.00)
4
1371.6
(54.00)
15
2
5
2
5
11
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
1219.2
(48.00)
1219.2
(48.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
4
4
914.4
(36.00)
914.4
(36.00)
6
7
6
or
8
7
762
(30.00)
762
(30.00)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
609.6
(24.00)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
609.6
(24.00)
457.2
(18.00)
457.2
(18.00)
13
9
9
304.8
(12.00)
304.8
(12.00)
152.4
(6.00)
152.4
(6.00)
0
0
0
152.4
(6.00)
304.8
(12.00)
457.2
(18.00)
609.6
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
914.4
(36.00)
1066.8 1143
(42.00) (45.00)
0
152.4
(6.00)
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
1
DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
5
INPUT ISOLATOR
2
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
6
DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR
3
RELAY LOGIC (VARIES)
7
DRIVE OUTPUT CONTACTOR
4
COMMUNICATION OPTION CARD (DRIVE OR PANEL MOUNTED)
8
9
98
BYPASS CONTACTOR
-
15
NEXT PAGE
304.8
(12.00)
13
457.2
609.6 635
(18.00) (24.00) (25.00)
Panel Layouts
E Frame Drives – 230V 56-93 kW (75-125 HP) – 460V 112-187 kW (150 @ 199A-250 HP) – 575V 112-224 kW (150-300 HP)
IP20 or IP54 (NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12)
Consult Allen-Bradley when adding additional heat producing components to existing NEMA Type 12 rated drives.
WITH OPTION BAY
WITHOUT OPTION BAY
2286
(90.00)
2286
(90.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1981.2
(78.00)
1981.2
(78.00)
14
(STD.)
1828.8
(72.00)
12
1524
(60.00)
15
1
14
3
1676.4
(66.00)
4
5
(STD.)
1828.8
(72.00)
10
1676.4
(66.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1
4
5
2
1524
(60.00)
11
1371.6
(54.00)
1371.6
(54.00)
11
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
1219.2
(48.00)
2
15
DRIVE
BRANCH
FUSING
(STD.)
1219.2
(48.00)
4
4
1066.8
(42.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
914.4
(36.00)
914.4
(36.00)
6
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
7
8
762
(30.00)
762
(30.00)
609.6
(24.00)
609.6
(24.00)
457.2
(18.00)
6
or
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
7
457.2
(18.00)
13
9
304.8
(12.00)
304.8
(12.00)
152.4
(6.00)
152.4
(6.00)
0
0
0
152.4
(6.00)
457.2
(18.00)
304.8
(12.00)
609.6
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
914.4
(36.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
13
9
1219.2 1371.6 1397.0
(48.00) (54.00) (55.00)
0
152.4
(6.00)
304.8
(12.00)
457.2
(18.00)
609.6
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
889
(35.00)
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
1
-
12
AUTO BYPASS LOGIC
9
OVERLOAD RELAY
13
MOTOR GROUND TERMINAL
10
BYPASS CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
14
LINE GROUND TERMINAL
11
BYPASS MOTOR FUSES
15
SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL
8
PREVIOUS PAGE
99
Panel Layouts
F Frame Drives– 460V 187-336 kW (250-450 HP) – 575V 261-298 kW (350-400 HP)
IP20 or IP54 (NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12)
Consult Allen-Bradley when adding additional heat producing components to existing IP 54 (NEMA Type 12) rated drives.
F FRAME 2-BAY WITHOUT BYPASS
F FRAME 3-BAY WITH BYPASS
2286
(90.00)
2286
(90.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
10
1981.2
(78.00)
1
1828.8
(72.00)
10
1981.2
(78.00)
1
1828.8
(72.00)
DRIVE BRANCH FUSING IS
RESIDENT ON THE DRIVE
1676.4
(66.00)
1524
(60.00)
1371.6
(54.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1524
(60.00)
(STD.)
2
DRIVE BRANCH FUSING IS
RESIDENT ON THE DRIVE
1676.4
(66.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
14
(STD.)
13
1371.6
(54.00)
3
15
2
3
4
1219.2
(48.00)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
5
11
1066.8
(42.00)
4
1219.2
(48.00)
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
5
11
1066.8
(42.00)
7
6
914.4
(36.00)
914.4
(36.00)
or
4
4
7
762
(30.00)
762
(30.00)
609.6
(24.00)
609.6
(24.00)
457.2
(18.00)
9
6
457.2
(18.00)
8
304.8
(12.00)
304.8
(12.00)
152.4
(6.00)
152.4
(6.00)
0
9
8
0
0
152.4
(6.00)
304.8
(12.00)
457.2
(18.00)
609.6
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
914.4
(36.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
1219.2
(48.00)
0
152.4
(6.00)
304.8
(12.00)
457.2
(18.00)
609.6
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
914.4
(36.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
1219.2
(48.00)
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
1
100
12
DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
5
INPUT ISOLATOR
2
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
6
DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR
3
RELAY LOGIC (VARIES)
7
DRIVE OUTPUT CONTACTOR
4
COMMUNICATION OPTION CARD (DRIVE OR PANEL MOUNTED
8
OVERLOAD RELAY
1371.6
(54.00)
1524
(60.00)
1676.4
(66.00)
1828.8
(72.00)
1981.2
(78.00)
Panel Layouts
G Frame Drives – 460V 224-448 kW (300-600 HP) – 575V 224-448 kW (300-600 HP)
IP20 or IP54 (NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12)
Consult Allen-Bradley when adding additional heat producing components to existing NEMA Type 12 rated drives.
2-BAY WITHOUT BYPASS
3-BAY WITH BYPASS
2286
(90.00)
2286
(90.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
2133.6
(84.00)
10
1981.2
(78.00)
1
DRIVE BRANCH FUSING IS
RESIDENT ON THE DRIVE
10
1981.2
(78.00)
1828.8
(72.00)
1
DRIVE BRANCH FUSING IS
RESIDENT ON THE DRIVE
14
1828.8
(72.00)
1676.4
(66.00)
1676.4
(66.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1524
(60.00)
(STD.)
2
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
1371.6
(54.00)
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1524
(60.00)
(STD.)
1371.6
(54.00)
3
13
3
4
1219.2
(48.00)
1219.2
(48.00)
5
1066.8
(42.00)
5
7
762
(30.00)
609.6
(24.00)
6
609.6
(24.00)
457.2
(18.00)
9
12
4
OR
762
(30.00)
7
11
914.4
(36.00)
6
4
4
1066.8
(42.00)
11
914.4
(36.00)
15
2
1336 PLUS II
DRIVE (STD.)
457.2
(18.00)
8
304.8
(12.00)
304.8
(12.00)
152.4
(6.00)
152.4
(6.00)
0
9
8
0
0
152.4
(6.00)
304.8
(12.00)
457.2
(18.00)
609.6
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
914.4
(36.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
1219.2
(48.00)
0
152.4
(6.00)
304.8
(12.00)
457.2
(18.00)
609.6
(24.00)
762
(30.00)
914.4
(36.00)
1066.8
(42.00)
1219.2
(48.00)
1371.6
(54.00)
1524
(60.00)
1676.4
(66.00)
1828.8
(72.00)
1981.2
(78.00)
All dimensions in millimeters and (inches)
1
9
10
11
- 88 PREVIOUS PAGE
12
BYPASS CONTACTOR
MOTOR PE
13
AUTO BYPASS LOGIC
LINE GROUND TERMINAL
14
BYPASS CIRCUIT BREAKER OR DISCONNECT SWITCH
SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL
15
BYPASS MOTOR FUSES
101
Wire Terminations
Power Wiring – Drive Terminal Block TB1
The TB1 Terminal Block connections shown below are a generic representation intended to show the interface of internal or remote power
devices to the power terminal block. Specific TB1 terminal locations may vary by standard drive rating. For more information refer to the
Standard Drives section.
The location of user cable connections to a configured drive will vary with the particular power options chosen. After an order is
entered, Approval Drawings or Manufacturing Drawings may be ordered prior to shipment, and specific customer interconnection
information is supplied.
PE
PE
or
or
Ground Ground
DC
DC BRAKE
+
–
Dynamic Brake
To Motor
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
Optional
Drive Output
Power Device 3
Configured Drive 1
Branch Fusing
(Provided as Standard)
Configured Drive
Power Disconnect
or Circuit Breaker 2
To Motor
AC Input Line
User-supplied remote power disconnect
ATTENTION: Any user-supplied disconnecting means wired to drive output terminals U, V and W must be capable of disabling
the drive if opened during drive operation. If opened during drive operation, the drive will continue to produce
output voltage between U, V and W. An auxiliary contact must be used to simultaneously disable the drive or output
component damage may occur.
User-supplied remote drive bypass system
ATTENTION: An incorrectly customer applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product
life. The most common causes are:
• Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals.
• Improper bypass or output circuits.
• Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor.
Contact Allen-Bradley for assistance with application or wiring.
1 Configured drives may have different input fuse ratings than those recommended for equivalent standard 1336 PLUS II drives. Configured drives are rated for a
single input voltage (not a voltage range) and may have fuses resident on the drive (F Frame) or an optional disconnect switch.
2 If a drive input power option is not supplied, incoming power connections are made directly to the drive branch fusing (except F or G Frame drives or any drive
with bypass).
3 If a drive output power option is not supplied, motor connections are made directly to drive terminals U, V and W.
102
Wire Terminations
Control and Signal Wiring – Drive Terminal Block TB2
The TB2 Terminal Block connections shown below are a generic representation intended to show the interface of internal or remote
signal and control devices to the terminal block. This terminal block is located on the bottom of the main control board. Specific TB2
terminal locations may vary by standard drive rating. For more information refer to the Standard Drives section.
The location of user control wire connections to a configured drive will vary with the particular control options chosen. After an order is
entered, Approval Drawings or Manufacturing Drawings may be ordered prior to shipment, and specific customer interconnection
information is supplied.
Programmable Run
TE
TE
1
2
3
4
5
–
to
TE
to
TE
10k Ohm
Remote Pot
6
+
7
+
8
–
9
+
10
11
12
Fault
CR3 CR3
13
14
15
Alarm
Alarm
CR4 CR4
16
17
18
to
TE
A1
A2
+ Standard Drive Contacts Shown In Unpowered State
Note: If Standard Drive Contacts CR2, CR3 & CR4 are used
by 1336 PLUS II Configured Drive options JF and/or
JR and/or JM, they will not be available for customer
use. Refer to the 1336 PLUS II Configured Drive
Option Description section for additional information.
These contacts are reprogrammable by the user.
0-10V or
4-20mA Input
to
TE
Fault
CR1 CR2
Installing an analog option board in the
slot A or B location will change the
standard function of these terminals.
ONLY PRESENT
ON B FRAME DRIVES
AND LARGER
ONLY PRESENT
ON B FRAME DRIVES
AND LARGER
to
TE
0-10V
Analog Out
User speed reference signals
ATTENTION: Signal Common – User reference signals are terminated to logic common at TB2, terminal 3, 4 or 5. This puts the
negative (or common) side of these signals at earth ground potential. Control schemes must be examined for
possible conflicts with this type of grounding scheme.
103
Wire Terminations
Control Interface Wiring – Drive Terminal Block TB3
Control interface inputs are connected to terminal Block TB3. TB3 is located on the Control Interface Board installed in the drive. All
1336 PLUS II Configured Drives come with a 115V AC Control Interface Card (Option L6) unless otherwise specified. 24V AC/DC control and
Contact Closure control are available as options. Encoder feedback is available as an option with any of the three control methods.
All control interface cards provide input terminals for access to fixed drive functions that include start, stop, and enable. Four additional
inputs are programmed for functions such as reverse, preset speed access, jog, second accel/decel time access and local control selection.
The function of each input is defined through programming. For Configured Drives, functions are pre-programmed at the factory for a
specific application and configuration and should not require field re-programming.
A variety of combinations made up of the following inputs are available.
Control Interface Options
115V
24V
TTL
• Start
• 2 Accel/Decel Rates • 2 Stop Mode Selects
AC
AC/DC
Contact
• Stop/Clear Fault
• 3 Speed Selects
• Run Forward
Without Encoder
• Reverse
• Enable
• Run Reverse
Std.
-L5C
-L4C
Feedback
• Digital Potentiometer (MOP) • Auxiliary
• Local Control
With Encoder
-L9EC
-L8EC
-L7EC
Feedback
ATTENTION: The drive is intended to be controlled by control input signals that will start and stop the motor. A device that
routinely disconnects then reapplies line power to the drive for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor
is not recommended. If this type of circuit is used, a maximum of 3 stops in any 5-minute period with a minimum
1-minute rest between each cycle is required. These 5-minute periods must be separated by 10-minute rest cycles
to allow the drive precharge resistors to cool. Refer to codes and standards applicable to your particular system for
specific requirements and additional information.
Start 1
Stop/Fault Reset
Common
Reverse
Jog
Auxiliary
Common
Speed Select 3
Speed Select 2
Speed Select 1
Common
Enable
Encoder B
Encoder NOT A
Encoder NOT B
Encoder A
+12V (200mA Maximum)
Encoder Common
ATTENTION: User remote speed reference signals are terminated to logic common at TB2 terminals 3 & 4. This puts the negative
or common side of these signals at earth ground potential. Control schemes should be examined for possible
conflict with this grounding scheme and possible equipment damage.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
INCLUDED ONLY ON
L7EC, L8EC & L9EC OPTIONS
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB3 is 2.1 and 0.30 mm2
(14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque for all terminals is 1.36 N-m (12 lb-in).
1 Configured drives will generally be factory programmed for the control scheme shown (Parameter 241 set to 2, which
is a 3-wire control), and all other inputs set to default. Refer to publication 1336 PLUS-5.3 for further information.
104
Selection Guide
Catalog Number Definition
Base Drive
Options as Required
1336F – B 020 C – AA
–
BM – GM1C – HA1C – . . .
Product Bulletin No.
VOLTAGE
HORSEPOWER
CODE
DUTY
ENCLOSURE
CODE DESCRIPTION
CODE DESCRIPTION
CODE DESCRIPTION
The chart shown on the next page details the segments that make up a Configured Drive Catalog Number. This chart should be used to
understand the scope of the overall product offering and assembling a specific catalog number. Care should be taken to verify that the
assembled catalog number qualifies as an available configuration (option combination) by referring to all pages of this section.
105
Selection Guide
VOLTAGE
A = 230V AC
B = 460V AC
C = 575V AC
106
HORSEPOWER
CODE CT HP VT HP
F05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
007
010
015
020
025
030
040
050
060
075
100
125
F05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
015
020
025
030
X040
040
050
X060
060
075
100
125
X150
150
200
250
P250
X250
300
P300
350
P350
400
P400
450
P450
500
600
F10
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
025
030
040
050
060
075
100
125
150
200
250
300
X300
350
400
450
500
600
0.5
0.7
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
40
—
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
250
—
300
300
350
350
400
400
450
450
500
600
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
300
350
400
450
500
600
DUTY
ENCLOSURE
C = Constant AA = NEMA
Torque
Type 1
AF = NEMA
Type 4
AJ = NEMA
Type 12
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
10
15
—
20
—
25
—
30
40
50
—
60
75
100
125
150
—
200
250
250
300
300
350
350
400
400
450
450
500
—
600
—
-A208 208V AC Input
-BA Bypass, Auto
-BC Bypass, Auto, SMC-Pump
CODE DESCRIPTION
-EP2 Enclosure Paint - Special,
Two-Color
-EP3 Encl. Paint - Special, Three-Color
CODE DESCRIPTION
-L5C Control Interface, 24V
-L6C Control Interface, 115V AC (Std.)
-L7EC Control Int, TTL, Encoder
-BD Bypass, Auto, SMC
-BM Bypass, Manual
-BP Bypass, Manual, SMC-Pump
-ET Enclosure Nameplate
-FM Fuse Block, Motor
-GD1C Single Point RI0
-L7EC Control Int, TTL, Encoder
-L8EC Control Int, 24V, Encoder
-L9EC Control Int, 115V, Encoder
-BS Bypass, Manual, SMC
-CB Circuit Breaker, Drive
-CC Circuit Breaker, Bypass
-GD2C RS232/422/485, DF1
-GM1C Single Point RI0
-GM2C RS232/422/485, DFI
-LQ Output Reactor, NEMA 1
-LR Input Reactor, NEMA 1
-LT Input Reactor, NEMA 4/12
-CF Control Power - Drive Only
-CM Common Mode Core
-CP Control Power Plus 250VA
-GM5C DeviceNet
-GM6C Enhanced DeviceNet
-GMS1C Single Point RIO
-LW Output Reactor, NEMA 4/12
-MB Blower Motor Starter
-ME Motor Time Run Meter
-CT Control Power. Plus 500VA
-DS Disconnect Switch, Drive
-DT Disconnect Switch, Bypass
-GMS2C RS232/422/485, DFI
-GMS5C DeviceNet
-GMS6C Enhanced DeviceNet
-MH Motor Heater Control, Remote Power
-MH2 Motor Heater Control, Local Power
-MK Thermal Overload-Class 20
-D10 Start, Stop, Jog, A/M
-D11 H/O/A and A/M Switches
-D12 D11 Plus Pilot Lights
-HABC HIM, Blank, NEMA Type 1
-HAPC HIM, Programmer, NEMA Type 1
-HA1C HIM, Analog, NEMA Type 1
-MP12A 12 Pulse Front End with
Auto Transformer
AF = NEMA
Type 4
-D13 H/O/A Selector Switch
-D14 D13 Plus PIlot Lights
-D15 A/M Selector Switch
-HA2C HIM, Digital, NEMA Type 1
-HJPC HIM, Programmer, NEMA Type 12
-HJ2C HIM, Digital, NEMA Type 1
-MP12N 12 Pulse Front End with
Isolation Transformer
AJ = NEMA
Type 12
-D16 D15 Plus Pilot Lights
-D17 Start & Stop PBs
-D18 Start, Stop A/M
-HNSBC HIM, Blank, Open
-HNSPC HIM, Programmer, Open
-HNS1C HIM, Analog, Open
-MP18A 18 Pulse Front End with
Auto Transformer
-D19 Start, Stop, Jog
-D21 Pilot Light Package
-D22 Pilot Light Package
-HNS2C HIM, Digital, Open
-JC Contacts, Control Power On
-JF Contacts, Fault
-MP18N 18 Pulse Front End with
Isolation Transformer
C = Constant AA = NEMA
Torque
Type 1
V = Variable
Torque
CODE DESCRIPTION
-D31 At Speed Pilot Light
-D32 Fwd/Rev Selector Switch
-D41 Drive & Bypass Lights
-JL PLC Hardware & Mounting
-JM Contacts, Alarm
-JR Contacts, Run
-MQ2 Line Metering System, Deluxe
-MQ3 Line Metering System, Basic
-MT Thermal Overload-Class 10
-D42 Auto Bypass Enable Off/On
S.S. and Bypass P.L.
-D51 Drive Disable PB (Contactor)
-JS SLC Hardware & Mounting
-JT Contacts, At Speed
-KD Contactor, Drive Input
-MX3 Conformal Coating
-N3 Analog Input Isolator
-N4C Transducer, Local Command
-D52 Drive Disable PB (Enable)
-D61 Speed Pot
-D91 800T Conversion
-KM Contactor, Drive Output
-LA1C Two Analog Outputs, One Input
-LA2C Two Analog Inputs
-N4T Transducer, Local Trim
-N5C Transducer, Remote Command
-N5T Transducer, Remote Trim
-EB Voltage Barrier
-EC Enclosure Filtered Door Openings
-EF1 Enclosure Floor Stand, 12"
-LA3C Two Analog Outputs
-LA4C One Analog Input and Output
-LA5C Two Analog Outputs, One Input
-N6A RTD Protection, 120 Ohm NIckel
-N7A RTD Protection 10 Ohm Copper
-N8A RTD Protection, 100 Ohm Platinum
-EF2 Enclosure Floor Stand, 24"
-EG Enclosure Filters and Gasketing
-EH Enclosure Heater, Remote Power
-LA6C Two Analog Inputs
-LA7C Two Analog Inputs
-L4C Control Interface, TTL
-EH2 Enclosure Heater, Local Power
-EP1 Enclosure Paint - Special,
One-Color
NOTE: Not all options are available with all ratings.
C = Constant AA = NEMA
Torque
Type 1
AF = NEMA
Type 4
AJ = NEMA
Type 12
-UL UL Panel Recognition
All Base Drive Catalog Numbers listed on the
following pages include:
• A Standard Drive
• Drive Branch Fusing
• A 115V AC Control Interface Card (Option -L6)
• Enclosure of Choice
Selection Guide
230V Constant Torque Drives and Enclosures 1, 2
Frame
A1
Drive Rating
Nominal HP
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4
Amps
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
General Purpose
Code
NEMA Type 4 (IP65)
Resists Water and Dust
Code
NEMA Type 12 (IP54)
Industrial Use, Dust Tight
Code
AF05C-AA
AF07C-AA
AF10C-AA
AF05C-AF
AF07C-AF
AF10C-AF
AF05C-AJ
AF07C-AJ
AF10C-AJ
1
2.3
3.0
4.5
A2
1 1⁄2
2
6.0
8.0
AF15C-AA
AF20C-AA
AF15C-AF
AF20C-AF
AF15C-AJ
AF20C-AJ
A3
3
5
12.0
18.0
AF30C-AA
AF50C-AA
AF30C-AF
AF50C-AF
AF30C-AJ
AF50C-AJ
B1
7 1⁄ 2
27.0
A007C-AA
A007C-AF
A007C-AJ
B2
10
15
34.0
48.0
A010C-AA
A015C-AA
A010C-AF
A015C-AF
A010C-AJ
A015C-AJ
C
20
25
30
65.0
77.0
80.0
A020C-AA
A025C-AA
A030C-AA
A020C-AF
A025C-AF
A030C-AF
A020C-AJ
A025C-AJ
A030C-AJ
D
40
50
60
120.0
150.0
180.0
A040C-AA
A050C-AA
A060C-AA
A040C-AF
A050C-AF
A060C-AF
A040C-AJ
A050C-AJ
A060C-AJ
E
75
100
125
240.0
292.0
325.0
A075C-AA
A100C-AA
A125C-AA
A075C-AF
A100C-AF
A125C-AF
A075C-AJ
A100C-AJ
A125C-AJ
Amps
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
General Purpose
Code
NEMA Type 4 (IP65)
Resists Water and Dust
Code
NEMA Type 12 (IP54)
Industrial Use, Dust Tight
Code
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
14.0
17.5
24.0
27.0
24.2
31.0
39.0
45.0
59.0
75.0
77.0
85.0
106.0
138.0
173.0
180.0
199.0
263.0
325.0
325.0
360.0
425.0
475.0
527.0
360.0
425.0
475.0
525.0
590.0
670.0
BF05C-AA
BF07C-AA
BF10C-AA
BF15C-AA
BF20C-AA
BF30C-AA
BF50C-AA
BF75C-AA
BF100C-AA
BF150C-AA
BF200C-AA
B015C-AA
B020C-AA
B025C-AA
B030C-AA
B040C-AA
B050C-AA
BX060C-AA
B060C-AA
B075C-AA
B100C-AA
B125C-AA
BX150C-AA
B150C-AA
B200C-AA
B250C-AA
BP250C-AA
BP300C-AA
BP350C-AA
BP400C-AA
BP450C-AA
B300C-AA
B350C-AA
B400C-AA
B450C-AA
B500C-AA
B600C-AA
BF05C-AF
BF07C-AF
BF10C-AF
BF15C-AF
BF20C-AF
BF30C-AF
BF50C-AF
BF75C-AF
BF100C-AF
BF150C-AF
BF200C-AF
B015C-AF
B020C-AF
B025C-AF
B030C-AF
B040C-AF
B050C-AF
BX060C-AF
B060C-AF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BF05C-AJ
BF07C-AJ
BF10C-AJ
BF15C-AJ
BF20C-AJ
BF30C-AJ
BF50C-AJ
BF75C-AJ
BF100C-AJ
BF150C-AJ
BF200C-AJ
B015C-AJ
B020C-AJ
B025C-AJ
B030C-AJ
B040C-AJ
B050C-AJ
BX060C-AJ
B060C-AJ
B075C-AJ
B100C-AJ
B125C-AJ
BX150C-AJ
B150C-AJ
B200C-AJ
B250C-AJ
BP250C-AJ
BP300C-AJ
BP350C-AJ
BP400C-AJ
—
B300C-AJ
B350C-AJ
B400C-AJ
B450C-AJ
B500C-AJ
B600C-AJ
460V Constant Torque Drives and Enclosures 1, 3
Frame
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C
D
E
F
G
Drive Rating
Nominal HP
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4
1
1 1⁄ 2
2
3
5
7 1⁄ 2
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
250
300
350
400
450
300
350
400
450
500
600
1 The basic drive does not include a Control Power Transformer. If local 115V AC power is not available, refer to options CF, CP and CT.
2 The drive rating is based on a nominal voltage of 240 volts and a carrier frequency of 4kHz at altitudes of 1,000 meters or less.
Refer to the Drive Derating Guidelines in the Standard Drives section.
3 The drive rating is based on a nominal voltage of 480 volts and a carrier frequency of 4kHz at altitudes of 1,000 meters or less.
Refer to the Drive Derating Guidelines in the Standard Drives section.
107
Selection Guide
460V Variable Torque Drives and Enclosures 1, 2, 4
Amps
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
General Purpose
Code
NEMA Type 4 (IP65)
Resists Water and Dust
Code
NEMA Type 12 (IP54)
Industrial Use, Dust Tight
Code
1
1 1⁄ 2
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
BF05V-AA
BF07V-AA
BF10V-AA
BF15V-AA
BF05V-AF
BF07V-AF
BF10V-AF
BF15V-AF
BF05V-AJ
BF07V-AJ
BF10V-AJ
BF15V-AJ
A2
2
3
4.0
6.0
BF20V-AA
BF30V-AA
BF20V-AF
BF30V-AF
BF20V-AJ
BF30V-AJ
A3
5
9.0
BF50V-AA
BF50V-AF
BF50V-AJ
A4
10
15
20
17.5
25.0
24.0
BF75V-AA
BF100V-AA
BF200V-AA
BF75V-AF
BF100V-AF
BF200V-AF
BF75V-AJ
BF100V-AJ
BF200V-AJ
B2
25
30
34.0
48.0
B020V-AA
B030V-AA
B020V-AF
B030V-AF
B020V-AJ
B030V-AJ
C
40
50
60
59.0
65.0
77.0
BX040V-AA
B050V-AA
BX060C-AA
BX040V-AF
B050V-AF
BX060V-AF
BX040V-AJ
B050V-AJ
BX060V-AJ
D
75
100
125
150
96.0
120
150
180
B060V-AA
B075V-AA
B100V-AA
BX125V-AA
—
—
—
—
B060V-AJ
B075V-AJ
B100V-AJ
BX125V-AJ
E
200
250
250
240
292
325
B150V-AA
B200V-AA
B250V-AA
—
—
—
B150V-AJ
B200V-AJ
B250V-AJ
F
300
350
400
450
360
425
475
532
BP250V-AA
BP300V-AA
BP350V-AA
BP400V-AA
—
—
—
—
BP250V-AJ
BP300V-AJ
BP350V-AJ
BP400V-AJ
G
300
350
400
450
500
600
360
425
475
525
590
670
BX250V-AA
B300V-AA
B350V-AA
B400V-AA
B450V-AA
B500V-AA
—
—
—
—
—
—
BX250V-AJ
B300V-AJ
B350V-AJ
B400V-AJ
B450V-AJ
B500V-AJ
NEMA Type 4 (IP65)
Resists Water and Dust
Code
NEMA Type 12 (IP54)
Industrial Use, Dust Tight
Code
Frame
A1
Drive Rating
Nominal HP
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4
575V Constant and Variable Torque Drives and Enclosures 1, 3
Drive Rating
Nominal HP
Amps
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
General Purpose
Code
A4
1
2
3
5
7 1⁄ 2
10
15
20
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
19.0
24.0
CF10C-AA
CF20C-AA
CF30C-AA
CF50C-AA
CF75C-AA
CF100C-AA
CF150CAA
CF200C-AA
CF10C-AF
CF20C-AF
CF30C-AF
CF50C-AF
CF75C-AF
CF100C-AF
CF150C-AF
CF200C-AF
CF10C-AJ
CF20C-AJ
CF30C-AJ
CF50C-AJ
CF75C-AJ
CF100C-AJ
CF150C-AJ
CF200C-AJ
C
25
30
40
50
60
30.0
35.0
45.0
57.0
62.0
C025C-AA
C030C-AA
C040C-AA
C050C-AA
C060C-AA
C025C-AF
C030C-AF
C040C-AF
C050C-AF
C060C-AF
C025C-AJ
C030C-AJ
C040C-AJ
C050C-AJ
C060C-AJ
D
75
100
125
85.0
109
138
C075C-AA
C100C-AA
C125C-AA
—
—
—
C075C-AJ
C100C-AJ
C125C-AJ
E
150
200
250
300
168
252
284
300
C150C-AA
C200C-AA
C250C-AA
CX300C-AA
—
—
—
—
C150C-AJ
C200C-AJ
C250C-AJ
CX300C-AJ
G
300
350
400
450
500
600
300
350
400
450
500
600
C300C-AA
C350C-AA
C400C-AA
C450C-AA
C500C-AA
C600C-AA
—
—
—
—
—
—
C300C-AJ
C350C-AJ
C400C-AJ
C450C-AJ
C500C-AJ
C600C-AJ
Frame
1 The basic drive does not include a Control Power Transformer. If local 115V AC power is not available, refer to options CF, CP and CT.
2 The drive rating is based on a nominal voltage of 480 volts and a carrier frequency of 4kHz at altitudes of 1,000 meters or less.
Refer to the Drive Derating Guidelines in the Standard Drives section.
3 The drive rating is based on a nominal voltage of 600 volts and a carrier frequency of 4kHz at altitudes of 1,000 meters or less.
Refer to the Drive Derating Guidelines in the Standard Drives section.
4 When choosing horsepower related options for variable torque drives, match the option to the actual variable torque horsepower
108
rating, not to the base catalog number. Example: A 15 HP VT Drive requires a 15 HP Circuit Breaker, not a 10 HP Circuit Breaker.
Selection Guide
Motor Thermal Overload Relay Data
The Thermal Overload Relay (Option MT) will have the following characteristics:
Class 10 (Bulletin 193) Relays:
Class 20 (Bulletin 592) Relays:
• Trip in 10 seconds or less at 600% of device current rating.
• Have integral heater elements – Additional heater elements are not required.
• Have auto or manual reset.
• Have trip settings per the range chart shown below
• If a motor outside the published adjustability range is to be used, complete motor data must be
supplied at order entry.
DRIVE RATING
kW (HP)
CLASS 10 ADJUSTABLE THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY (OPTION CODE -MT)
ADJUSTABLE RANGE
230V
460V-CT
460V-VT
575V
0.37 (0.5)
1.6-2.4 A
1-1.6 A
1-1.6 A
—
0.56 (0.75)
0.75 (1)
1.2 (1.5)
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
18.5 (25)
22 (30)
30 (40)
37 (50)
45 (60)
56 (75)
75 (100)
93 (125)
112 (150) D Frame
112 (150) E Frame
149 (200)
187 (250) 292 A
187 (250) 325 A
224 (300)
261 (350)
298 (400)
336 (450)
373 (500)
448 (600)
2.4-4 A
4-6 A
4-6 A
6-10 A
10-16 A
16-24 A
18-30 A
30-45 A
45-60 A
60-75 A
70-90 A
70-90 A
80-120 A
120-200 A
120-200 A
180-300 A
180-300 A
240-400 A
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1-1.6 A
1.6-2.4 A
2.4-4 A
2.4-4 A
4-6 A
10-16 A
10-16 A
10-16 A
16-24 A
18-30 A
30-45 A
30-45 A
45-60 A
60-75 A
70-90 A
66-110 A
120-200 A
120-200 A
120-200 A
180-300 A
180-300 A
240-400 A
—
240-400 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
645-975 A
1-1.6 A
1.6-2.4 A
2.4-4 A
2.4-4 A
4-6 A
6-10 A
10-16 A
10-16 A
16-24 A
18-30 A
30-45 A
45-60 A
45-60 A
60-75 A
70-90 A
66-110 A
80-120 A
120-200 A
120-200 A
—
180-300 A
180-300 A
240-400 A
240-400 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
645-975 A
—
1.6-2.4 A
—
2.4-4 A
4-6 A
6-10 A
6-10 A
10-16 A
16-24 A
16-24 A
18-30 A
30-45 A
30-45 A
45-60 A
60-75 A
66-110 A
80-120 A
120-200 A
—
120-200 A
180-300 A
180-300 A
180-300 A
180-300 A
240-400 A
240-400 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
378-630 A
• Trip in 20 seconds or less at 600% of device current rating.
• Must be manually reset.
• Can be programmed for Class 20 operation by choosing the appropriate heater elements from the
A-B Industrial Control Catalog – Publication A113, or the chart on the next page.
• Can also be programmed for Class 10 and 30 operation by choosing the appropriate heater elements
from the A-B Industrial Control Catalog – Publication A113.
109
Selection Guide
Heater Element Selection
The Thermal Overload Relay (Option MK) will require the addition of thermal overload heater elements. These elements are not available
as part of the Configured Drives Program. The Class 20 chart shown below is supplied for reference purposes only. If Class 10 or 30
operation is required, refer to the A-B Industrial Control Catalog – Publication A112 for selection guidance.
Rating
Motor Full Load Amperes for Sizing of Class 20 Heater Elements for Various Options Drive Ratings in kW (HP)
230V
460V-CT
460V-VT
575V
0.37-3.7 (0.5-5)
0.37-3.7 (0.5-5)
0.37-3.7 (0.5-5)
0.37-3.7 (0.5-5)
5.5-7.5 (7.5-10)
5.5-18.5 (7.5-25)
5.5-18.5 (7.5-25)
5.5-22 (7.5-30)
11-18.5 (15-25)
22-30 (30-40)
22-30 (30-40)
30-45 (40-60)
22-37 (30-50)
37-75 (50-100)
37-75 (50-100)
56-93 (75-125)
45 (60)
93-112 (125-150)
93-112 (125-150)
112 (150)
56-75 (75-100)
149-187 (200-250)
149-187 (200-250)
149-224 (200-300)
93 (125)
224 (300)
224 (300)
261-336 (350-450)
—
261-373 (350-500)
261-373 (350-500)
373 (500)
Heater
Type W
Number
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
0.49
0.54
0.60
0.67
0.74
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
70
75
…
…
…
…
127
…
…
…
…
…
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
0.84
0.90
1.00
1.10
1.22
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
43
45
50
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
78
85
94
…
115
125
135
147
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
1.31
1.43
1.55
1.66
1.80
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
54
59
65
70
75
…
…
…
…
127
104
114
125
139
150
165
179
196
216
232
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
1.97
2.12
2.33
2.59
2.84
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
81
89
98
110
120
138
151
166
183
198
160
175
195
215
235
260
287
315
350
385
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
3.15
3.46
3.84
4.27
4.73
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
132
143
155
170
193
218
239
260
285
310
260
298
320
350
380
420
465
515
570
630
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
W45
W46
W47
W48
W49
5.36
5.82
6.33
6.97
7.63
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
415
455
500
550
…
…
…
…
…
…
W45
W46
W46
W48
W49
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
8.49
9.24
10.1
11.1
12.2
8.45
9.29
10.3
11.4
12.5
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
W55
W56
W57
W58
W59
13.6
14.6
15.7
17.2
18.9
13.7
15.0
16.3
17.6
18.9
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
W55
W56
W57
W58
W59
W60
W61
W62
W63
W64
20.5
22.2
24.3
…
…
20.9
22.9
25.0
27.6
30.0
21.1
23.2
25.7
28.5
30.5
…
25.1
27.5
30.5
33.5
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
W60
W61
W62
W63
W64
W65
W66
W67
W68
W69
…
…
…
…
…
32.0
34.0
37.0
39.0
41.0
33.0
35.5
38.5
41.5
45.0
36.5
40.0
44.0
48.5
53
…
43.0
47.0
51
56
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
W65
W66
W67
W68
W69
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
48.5
53
56
58
60
58
62
67
72
77
61
66
72
77
83
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
W75
W76
W77
W78
W79
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
62
…
…
…
…
82
88
94
98
102
89
95
102
108
116
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
W75
W76
W77
W78
W79
W80
W81
W82
W83
W84
W85
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
108
117
125
…
…
…
123
130
137
150
160
165
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
W80
W81
W82
W83
W84
W85
Table 181 1
Table 195 1
1 Heater element selection tables taken from A-B Industrial Control Catalog – Publication A113.
110
Selection Guide
460V Variable Torque Drives and Enclosures 1, 2, 4
Listed in the chart below are possible option combination conflicts that may occur when selecting 1336 PLUS II Configured Drive Options.
Option Selection Rules
Option
A208
AA
AF
AJ
BA
BC
BD
BM
BP
BS
CB
CC
CF
CM
CP
CT
DS
DT
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D21
D22
D31
D32
D41
D42
D51
D52
D61
D91
EB
EC
EF1
EF2
Must Be Used With…
230V Base Drives
JF
JF
JF
JF
JF
JF
one BA, BC, BD, BM, BP or BS
CF, CT
CF, CP
CB
one BA, BC, BD, BM BP or BS
CC
D11-D19, HA1C, HA2C, HJ2C
D10, D12-D19
D10, D11, D13-D19, L4C, L7EC
D10-D12, D14-D19
D10-D13, D15-D19, L4C, L7EC
D10-D14, D16-D19
D10-D15, D17-D19, L4C, L7EC
D10-D16, D18, D19, HA1C, HA2C, HJ2C
D10-D17, D19, HA1C, HA2C, HJ2C
D10-D18, HA1C, HA2C, HJ2C
D22
one BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, BS, MK or MT D21
D32
D31, BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, BS, CC, DT, FM,
HA1C, HA2C, HJ2C
one BA, BC, BD, BM, BP or BS
D42
one BA, BC, BD
D41, BM, BP, BS
one BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, BS or KM
D52
D51, BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, BS
HA1C, HA2C, HJ2C, LA2C, LA6C, LA7C
At least one: D10-19, D21-22, D31-32,
D41-42, D51 or D52
AA, Frames D, E & G
Wall Mounting Enclosures
(Frames A-C)
Wall Mounting Enclosures
(Frames A-C)
AA, Frames D-G
JR
JR, one of CF, CP, CT
EG
EH
EH2
EN910C
EN935C
EN945C
EP1
EP2
EP3
ET
FM
one BA, BC, BD, BM, BP or BS
GD1C
GD2C
GM1C
GM2C
GM5C
GM6C
GMS1C
GMS2C
GMS5C
GMS6C
GU6C
Cannot Be Used With…
460 or 575V Base Drives
AF, AJ, HJPC, HJ2C
AA, AJ, HABC, HAPC, HA1C, HA2C
AA, AF, HABC, HAPC, HA1C, HA2C
BC, BD, BM, BP, BS, KM, MK, MT
BA, BD, BM, BP, BS, KM, MK, MT
BA, BC, BM, BP, BS, KM, MK, MT
BA, BC, BD, BP, BS, KM, MK, MT
BA, BC, BD, BM, BS, KM, MK, MT
BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, KM, MK, MT
DS
DT
CP, CT
24V DC user supplied power
AF, AJ, EG, Frames A-C
B060C-B600C, B060V-B500V,
C075C-C600C, EF2 (Frames D-G)
B060C-B600C, B060V-B500V,
C075C-C600C, EF1 (Frames D-G)
AF, AJ, EC, Frames A-C
EH2
EH
EN935C, EN945C
EN910C, EN945C
EN910C, EN935C
EP2, EP3
EP1, EP3
EP1, EP2
GM1C, GMS1C, GD2C, GU6C, HABC, HAPC,
HA1C, HA2C, HJBC, HJPC, HJ2C
GM2C, GMS2C, GD1C, GU6C, HABC, HAPC,
HA1C, HA2C, HJBC, HJPC, HJ2C
GD1C, GM2C, GM5C, GMS1C Frame A Drives
GD2C, GM1C, GM5C, GMS2C Frame A Drives
GM1C. GM2C, GMS5C Frame A Drives
GM1C, GM2C, GM5C, GU6C, GMS6C Frame A Drv
GD1C, GM1C, GMS2C, GMS5C, HNSBC, HNSPC,
HNS1C, HNS2C
GD2C, GM2C, GMS1C, GMS5C, HNSBC, HNSPC,
HNS1C, HNS2C
GM5C, GMS1C, GMS2C, HNSBC, HNSPC,
HNS1C, HNS2C
GM6C, GMS1C, GMS2C, GMS5C, HNSBC, GU6C,
HNSPC, HNS1C, HNS2C
GM6C, GMS6C, GD1C, GD2C, HABC, HAPC,
HA1C, HA2C, HJBC, HJPC, HJ2C
Option
HABC
Must Be Used With…
AA
HAPC
AA
HA1C
AA
HA2C
AA
HNSBC
HNSPC
HNS1C
HNS2C
HJPC
AF or AJ
HJ2C
AF or AJ
JC
JF
JL
JM
JR
JS
JT
KD
KM
LA1C
LA2C
LA3C
LA4C
LA5C
LA6C
LA7C
L4C
L5C
L7EC
L8EC
L9EC
LQ
LR
LT
LW
MB
ME
MH
MH2
MK
MT
MP12A
MP12N
MP18A
MP18N
MQ2
MQ3
MX3C
N3
N4C
N4T
N5C
N5T
N6A
N7A
N8A
UL
Cannot Be Used With…
AF, AJ, GD1C, GD2C, GU6C, HAPC, HA1C, HA2C,
HJPC, HJ2C
AF, AJ, GD1C, GD2C, GU6C, HABC, HA1C, HA2C,
HJPC, HJ2C
AF, AJ, D10, D17, D18, D19, GD1C, GD2C, GU6C,
HABC, HAPC, HA2C, HJPC, HJ2C
AF, AJ, D10, D17, D18, D19, GD1C, GD2C, GU6C,
HABC, HAPC, HA1C, HJPC, HJ2C
HNSPC, HNS1C, HNS2C, GMS1C, GMS2C,
GMS5C
HNSBC, HNS1C, HNS2C, GMS1C, GMS2C,
GMS5C
HNSBC, HNSPC, HNS2C, GMS1C, GMS2C,
GMS5C
HNSBC, HNSPC, HNS1C, GMS1C, GMS2C,
GMS5C
AA, GD1C, GD2C, GU6C, HABC, HAPC, HA1C,
HA2C, HJ2C
AA, D10, D17, D18, D19, GD1C, GD2C, GU6C,
HABC, HAPC, HA1C, HA2C, HJ2C,
JS
JL
JF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
AA
AA
AF or AJ
AF or AJ
JR
JR
JR, one of CF, CP, CT
KM
BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, BS, KD
LA3C, LA4C, LA5C
D61, LA6C, LA7C, N3, N4C, N4T, N5C, N5T
LA1C, LA4C, LA5C
LA1C, LA3C, LA5C
LA1C, LA3C, LA4C
D61, LA2C, LA7C, N3, N4C, N4T, N5C, N5T
D61, LA2C, LA6C, N3, N4C, N4T, N5C, N5T
D12, D14, D16, L5C, L7EC, L8EC, L9EC
L4C, L7EC, L8EC, L9EC
D12, D14, D16, L4C, L5C, L8EC, L9EC
L4C, L5C, L7EC, L9EC
L4C, L5C, L7EC, L8EC
AF, AJ, LT, LW
AF, AJ, LT, LW
AA, LR, LQ
AA, LR, LQ
MH2
MH
BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, BS, MT
BA, BC, BD, BM, BP, BS, MK
LR, LT, MP12N, MP18A, MP18N
MP12A, MP18A, MP18N
LR, LT, MP12A, MP12N, MP18N
MP12A, MP12N, MP18A
MQ3
MQ2
LA2C, LA6C, LA7C, N4C, N4T, N5C, N5T
LA2C, LA6C, LA7C, N3, N4T, N5C, N5T
LA2C, LA6C, LA7C, N3, N4C, N5C, N5T
LA2C, LA6C, LA7C, N3, N4C, N4T, N5T
LA2C, LA6C, LA7C, N3, N4C, N4T, N5C
N7A, N8A
N6A, N8A
N6A, N7A
111
Drawing Sample
Page 1 – Drive and Power Distribution
Each Configured Drive ships with a set of order specific computer generated schematics. Though a given drive package may be configured
and ordered as desired by the customer, the drawing information remains consistent. This is especially helpful when multiple drive ratings
and/or different configurations are ordered. The following pages illustrate a typical set of 1336 PLUS II Configured Drive schematics.
The Drive and Power Distribution page of the drawings contains the 1336 PLUS II drive, the heart and brains of the system, and all the
power related components. The power distribution scheme is determined by the catalog number options chosen. Any Human Interface
Modules or drive mounted options located within the drive package will also be shown on this page. Motor data will be shown if supplied
with the order or if an Allen-Bradley motor is ordered.
112
Drawing Sample
Page 2 – Control Interface
The Control Interface page of the drawings contains the drive Main Control Board and the standard Control Interface Board, as well as all
the control logic that interfaces to these two boards. Several customer interlock locations are included in the logic to allow interfacing of
extraneous control devices to the existing drive logic.
113
Drawing Sample
Page 3 – Control Logic
The Control Logic page of the drawings contains the control power supply and all associated control ladder logic not found on the
previous page. The complexity of this page changes dramatically with the number of options chosen. Notice the customer interlock
locations in the logic to allow remote interfacing.
114
Drawing Sample
Page 4 – Enclosure, Panel Layout and Data Nameplate
This page of the drawing package provides all the necessary enclosure information including: dimensions, conduit access, operator
devices and location, and panel layout. The actual drive system data nameplate is also shown on this sheet – this is helpful for
customers who might have multiple drives in one location and need to quickly match up the correct documentation for each actual
drive by comparing nameplates.
115
Drawing Sample
Page 5 – Parts List and Interconnection Wiring
This page provides a list of the non-drive peripheral components contained in the system package. The A-B part number, vendor and
vendor’s part number are included. Also provided is a list of remote wiring interconnections required and the acceptable wire gauges;
for power, control and signal wiring. This page has a lot of useful contractor/installer type information.
116
Drawing Sample
Page 6 – Parameter Settings
The Parameter Settings page provides a list of the parameters, the normal “Standard Drive” factory default values, and the
special “Configured Drive” factory default values. Extra room is provided for the user to enter his own “as installed”
parameter settings.
117
Packaging Programs
When Allen-Bradley
Manufactures Your
Drive Package…
You Can Count On:
Enclosure Sizing
Factory Wired Options
Designed to meet
NEMA standards
Proper wire type and size
Sufficient heat dissipation
Separated power, control
and signal
Neatly bundled and routed
Drive Input, Output and
Bypass Contractors
Bypass/System
Circuit Breaker
Door-Mounted
Operator Devices
Bypass Mode
Motor Fusing
Drive
Mechanical Door
Interlock
Drive Mode
Circuit Breaker
Digital Meter
HIM Cable
Drive Input Fusing
Door-Mounted
Operator Devices
TB2 Control
Terminal Block
Control Power
Transformer with Fusing
TB3 Control Interface
Terminal Block
Auxiliary Control
Terminal Block
Relay Logic
TB1 Power
Terminal Block
60 HP 6 Pulse 460V AC NEMA Type 1, 4 or 12 Wall Mounted Configured Drive with Bypass
118
Packaging Programs
Consistent Panel
Component Layouts
Proper electrical/
mechanical clearances
Provision for Mounting
Slotted tabs on small drives
Floorplate holes on
larger drives
Lower cost customer
interface wiring
Consistent Door
Layouts
Easier operator training
Functionality is consistent
Aesthetically/ergonomically
pleasing
Provision for Lifting
Slotted chassis holes on
small drives
Removable lifting bar on
large drives
Faster troubleshooting
Enclosure
Exhaust Fans
Drive
Drive Input
Fuses
Auxiliary Control
Terminal Block
Door-Mounted
Operator Devices
Relay Logic
Drive Circuit
Breaker
Drive Output
Contactor
Control Power
Transformer
with Fusing
Drive Input
Contactor
Line Ground
Terminal
Motor Thermal
Overload Relay
Power
Distribution
Terminal Block
Bypass
Contactor
Bypass Mode
Smart Motor
Controller (SMC)
SMC Output
Contactor
Motor Ground
Terminal
500 HP 6 Pulse 460V AC NEMA Type 1 Floor Mounted Configured Drive with SMC Style Bypass
119
The 1336 PLUS II is a world class product that will help to provide
you with a single solution for virtually all of your speed control
requirements. Its common design and control interface functions
will help save you time and money in set-up, integration, and
maintenance of your automation system.
For Allen-Bradley Drives support, there are specialists at local
sales offices and distributor locations across North America and
around the world. We also offer Global Technical Services,
specializing in a full spectrum of value-added services and
expertise to help simplify maintenance and enhance productivity.
Rockwell Automation is committed to helping you meet everchanging customer demands for more, less expensive product in
less time. Our capabilities enable us to become your “Complete
Automation™” partner.
1336 FORCE, 1336 IMPACT, DriveTools32, Flex, SLC, SCANport, SMC, SMC Dialog Plus,
SMP, CENTERLINE, Complete Automation and the Complete Automation graphic are
trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.
ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
www.rockwellautomation.com
Corporate Headquarters
Rockwell Automation, 777 East Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1400, Milwaukee, WI, 53202-5302 USA, Tel: (1) 414.212.5200, Fax: (1) 414.212.5201
Headquarters for Allen-Bradley Products, Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe: Rockwell Automation SA/NV, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36-BP 3A/B, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, 27/F Citicorp Centre, 18 Whitfield Road, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 6040 Ponders Court, Greenville, SC 29615-4617 USA, Tel: (1) 864.297.4800, Fax: (1) 864.281.2433
Europe: Rockwell Automation, Brühlstraße 22, D-74834 Elztal-Dallau, Germany, Tel: (49) 6261 9410, Fax: (49) 6261 1774
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, 55 Newton Road, #11-01/02 Revenue House, Singapore 307987, Tel: (65) 351 6723, Fax: (65) 355 1733
Publication 1336F-TD001B-EN-P — May 2002
Supersedes 1336F-TD001A-EN-P — March 2001
Copyright ©2002 Rockwell Automation. All Rights Reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement